This is a modern-English version of Carpentry for Boys: In a Simple Language, Including Chapters on Drawing, Laying Out Work, Designing and Architecture With 250 Original Illustrations, originally written by Zerbe, James Slough.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
The "How-to" Books
CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
in simple language, including
chapters on drawing, laying out
work, designing and architecture
WITH 250 ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS
By J. S. ZERBE, M.E.
AUTHOR OF
ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
NYC
Copyright, 1914, by
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
[Pg i]
[Pg i]
CONTENTS
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS | |
INTRODUCTORY | |
I. Tools and Their Uses | Page 5 |
| |
II. How to Grind and Sharpen Tools | Page 16 |
| |
III. How to Hold and Use Tools | Page 29 |
| |
IV. How to Create Articles | Page 39 |
| |
V. How work is Organized | Page 43 |
| |
VI. The Uses of the Compass and the Square | Page 59 |
| |
VII. How the Various Structural Parts are Named | Page 65 |
| |
VIII. Drawing and Its Uses | Page 73 |
| |
IX. Moldings, with Practical Examples in Decorative Work | Page 93 |
| |
X. An Analysis of Tenoning, Mortising, Rabbeting, and Beading | Page 104 |
| |
XI. Building a House | Page 113 |
| |
XII. Bridges, Trussed Systems, and Similar Structures | Page 130 |
| |
XIII. The Best Types of Wood for Beginners | Page 134 |
| |
XIV. Woodturning | Page 138 |
| |
XV. Using Stains | Page 147 |
| |
XVI. The Carpenter and the Architect | Page 152 |
XVII. Helpful Articles to Create | Page 155 |
| |
XVIII. Special tools and their uses | Page 170 |
| |
XIX. Roof Trusses | Page 185 |
| |
XX. On Building Joints | Page 197 |
| |
XXI. Some Mistakes and Some Tips in Carpentry | Page 205 |
| |
GLOSSARY OF WORDS | |
THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS |
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIG. | |
1. A typical work bench[Pg vii] | Frontispiece |
PAGE | |
2. Hatchet | 6 |
3. Hammer | 7 |
4. Common saw | 7 |
5. Plane | 8 |
6. Jack plane bit | 9 |
6a. Fore plane bit | 10 |
7a. Firmer chisel | 11 |
Mortising chisel | 12 |
8. Trestle | 12 |
9. Miter box | 13 |
10. Incorrect saw setting | 17 |
10a. Correct saw setting | 17 |
11. Saw setting device | 17 |
12. Filing angle | 18 |
13. Rip saw | 19 |
14. Cross cut | 20 |
15. Filing clamp | 21 |
16. Grindstone | 23 |
17. Correct manner of holding tool | 24 |
18. Incorrect way of holding tool | 24 |
19. Gage | 26 |
20. Starting a saw | 31 |
21. Wrong sawing angle | 32 |
22. Correct sawing angle | 33 |
23. Thrust cut | 34 |
24. Chinese saw | 34 |
25. Moving angle for plane | 35 |
26. Holding gage | 36 |
27. Laying out table leg | 43 |
28. The first marking line | 44 |
29. Scribing mortise line | 44 |
30. The corner[Pg viii] mortises | 44 |
31. The side rail | 46 |
32. Scribing the tenons | 46 |
33. Cross scoring | 47 |
34. The tenon | 47 |
35. Finishing the tenon | 47 |
36. The tenon and mortise | 48 |
37. The drawer support | 48 |
38. Drawer cleats | 49 |
39. Assembled table frame | 50 |
40. The top | 51 |
41. The drawer | 52 |
42. Bevel joint | 53 |
43. Miter joint | 53 |
44. Picture frame joint | 54 |
45. Initial marks for dovetails | 55 |
46. End marks for dovetails | 55 |
47. Angles for dovetails | 55 |
48. Cutting out recesses for dovetails | 56 |
49. Tongues for dovetails | 56 |
50. Recess for dovetails | 56 |
51. Determining angles | 61 |
52. Marking degrees | 63 |
53. Angles from base lines | 63 |
54. Stepping off spaces | 63 |
55. Arcade | 67 |
56. Arch | 67 |
57. Buttress | 67 |
58. Chamfer | 67 |
59. Cooter | 67 |
60. Crenelated | 67 |
61. Crosses | 67 |
62. Curb roof | 67 |
63. Cupola | 67 |
64. Console | 67 |
65. Corbels | 67 |
66. Dormer | 67 |
67. Dowel | 67 |
68. Drips | 67 |
69. Detail[Pg ix] | 68 |
70. Extrados | 68 |
71. Engrailed | 68 |
72. Facet | 68 |
73. Fret | 68 |
74. Frontal | 68 |
75. Frustrums | 68 |
76. Fylfat | 68 |
77. Gambrel | 68 |
78. Gargoyle | 68 |
79. Gudgeon | 68 |
80. Guilloche | 68 |
81. Half timbered | 68 |
82. Hammer beam | 68 |
83. Haunches | 69 |
84. Header | 69 |
85. Hip roof | 69 |
86. Hood molding | 69 |
87. Inclave | 69 |
88. Interlacing arch | 69 |
89. Invected | 69 |
90. Inverted arch | 69 |
91. Keystone | 69 |
92. King post | 69 |
93. Label | 69 |
94. Louver | 69 |
95. Lintel | 70 |
96. Lug | 70 |
97. M-roof | 70 |
98. Mansard roof | 70 |
99. Newel post | 70 |
100. Parquetry | 70 |
101. Peen, or pein | 70 |
102. Pendant | 70 |
103. Pentastyle | 70 |
104. Pedestal | 70 |
105. Pintle | 70 |
106. Portico | 70 |
107. Plate | 70 [Pg x] |
108. Queen post | 71 |
109. Quirk molding | 71 |
110. Re-entering | 71 |
111. Rafter | 71 |
112. Scarfing | 71 |
113. Scotia molding | 71 |
114. Sill | 71 |
115. Skew back | 71 |
116. Spandrel | 71 |
117. Strut | 71 |
118. Stud, studding | 71 |
119. Stile | 72 |
120. Trammel | 72 |
121. Turret | 72 |
122. Transom | 72 |
123. Valley roof | 72 |
125. Plain line | 74 |
126. Concave shading | 74 |
127. Convex shading | 74 |
128. Wave shading | 75 |
129. Light past concave surface | 75 |
130. Light past convex surface | 75 |
131. Plain surface | 75 |
132. Outlines | 76 |
133. Raised surface | 77 |
134. Depressed surface | 77 |
135. Shading raised surfaces | 78 |
136. Shading depressed surfaces | 78 |
137. Plain cubical outline | 79 |
138. Indicating cube | 79 |
139. Confused lines | 79 |
140. Heavy horizontal lines | 80 |
141. Heavy vertical lines | 80 |
142. Isometric cube | 81 |
143. Cube and circle | 81 |
144. Flattened perspective | 82 |
145. Angles in isometric cube | 83 |
146. Plain circle | 84 |
147. Sphere shading | 84 [Pg xi] |
148. Drawing regular ellipse | 86 |
149. Drawing irregular ellipse | 88 |
150. Drawing spiral | 89 |
151. Abscissa | 90 |
152. Angle | 91 |
153. Apothegm | 91 |
154. Apsides, or apsis | 91 |
155. Chord | 91 |
156. Convolute | 91 |
157. Conic sections | 91 |
158. Conoid | 91 |
159. Cycloid | 91 |
160. Ellipsoid | 91 |
161. Epicycloid | 91 |
162. Evolute | 91 |
163. Focus | 91 |
164. Gnome | 91 |
165. Hyperbola | 91 |
167. Hypothenuse | 91 |
168. Incidence | 92 |
169. Isosceles triangle | 92 |
170. Parabola | 92 |
171. Parallelogram | 92 |
172. Pelecoid | 92 |
173. Polygons | 92 |
174. Pyramid | 92 |
175. Quadrant | 92 |
176. Quadrilaterale | 92 |
177. Rhomb | 92 |
178. Sector | 92 |
179. Segment | 92 |
180. Sinusoid | 92 |
181. Tangent | 92 |
182. Tetrahedron | 92 |
183. Vertex | 92 |
184. Volute | 92 |
185. Band (molding)e | 94 |
186. Astragal (molding) | 94 |
187. Cavetto (molding) | 94 [Pg xii] |
188. Ovolo (molding) | 94 |
189. Torus (molding) | 95 |
190. Apophyges (molding) | 95 |
191. Cymatium (molding) | 95 |
192. Ogee-recta (molding) | 95 |
193. Ogee-reversa (molding) | 96 |
194. Bead (molding) | 96 |
195. Casement (molding) | 97 |
196. The Doric column | 98 |
197. Front of cabinet | 100 |
198. Facia board | 100 |
199. Molding on facia board | 100 |
200. Ogee-recta on facia | 101 |
201. Trim below facia | 101 |
202. Trim below ogee | 101 |
203. Trim above base | 102 |
204. Trim above base molding | 102 |
205. Shadows cast by plain moldings | 103 |
206. Mortise and tenon joint | 105 |
207. Incorrect mortising | 105 |
208. Steps in mortising | 106 |
209. The shoulders of tenons | 108 |
210. Lap-and-butt joint | 108 |
211. Panel joint | 109 |
212. Scarfing | 109 |
213. Tongue and groove | 110 |
214. Beading | 110 |
215. Outside beading finish | 110 |
216. Edge beading | 111 |
217. Corner beading | 111 |
218. Point beading | 111 |
219. Round edge beading | 111 |
220. Beading and molding | 111 |
221. First square house plan | 117 |
222. First rectangular house plan | 118 |
223. Square house to scale | 119 |
224. Rectangular house to scale | 120 |
225. Front elevation of square house | 121 |
226. Elevation of rectangular house | 121 [Pg xiii] |
227. Illustrating one-third pitch | 122 |
228. Illustrating half pitch | 122 |
229. The sills at the corner | 123 |
230. The joist and sills | 123 |
231. The plate splice | 124 |
232. The rafters | 124 |
233. The gutter | 126 |
234. The cornice | 127 |
234a. The finish without gutter | 128 |
235. Common truss | 130 |
236. Upright truss | 131 |
237. Vertical upright truss | 131 |
238. Warren girder | 132 |
239. Extended Warren girder | 132 |
240. Bowstring girder | 132 |
241. Frame details of wood turning lathe | 139 |
242. Tail stock details | 133 |
243. Tool rest details | 142 |
244. Section of mandrel | 143 |
245. View of turning lathe | 145 |
246. Turning tools | 146 |
247. Bench | 155 |
248. Stool | 156 |
249. Blacking box | 156 |
250. Easel | 157 |
251. Hanging book rack | 158 |
252. Book shelf | 159 |
253. Wood box | 160 |
254. Horizontal bars | 161 |
255. Mission desk | 161 |
256. Screen frame | 162 |
257. Mission chair | 162 |
258. Grandfather's clock | 163 |
259. Frame for bookcase | 164 |
260. Coal scuttle case | 165 |
261. Mission arm chair | 165 |
262. Dog house | 166 |
263. Settle | 167 |
264. Towel rack | 168 [Pg xiv] |
265. Mission sofa frame | 168 |
266. Bit and square level | 170 |
267. Metal miter box | 171 |
268. Parts of metal miter box | 172 |
269. Angle dividers | 173 |
270. An "odd job" tool | 174 |
271. Universal-jaw brace | 176 |
272. Taper-shank bit brace | 176 |
273. Alligator-jaw brace | 176 |
274. Steel frame breast drill | 177 |
275. Steel frame breast drill | 177 |
276. Steel frame breast drill | 177 |
277. Details of metal plane | 179 |
278. Rabbet, matching and dado plane | 180 |
279. Molding and beading plane | 181 |
280. Dovetail tongue and groove plane | 182 |
281. Router planes | 183 |
282. Router planes | 183 |
283. Door trim plane | 184 |
284. Gambrel roof | 187 |
285. Purlin roof | 188 |
286. Princess truss | 189 |
287. Arched, or cambered, tie beam | 190 |
288. The mansard | 191 |
289. Scissors beam | 192 |
290. Braced collar beam | 193 |
291. Rib and collar truss | 194 |
291½. Hammer-beam truss | 195 |
292. Bridle joints | 197 |
293. Spur tenons | 198 |
294. Saddle joints | 198 |
295. Joggle joints | 199 |
296. Framing joints | 199 |
297. Heel joints | 200 |
298. Stub tenon | 200 |
299. Tusk tenon | 201 |
300. Double tusk tenon | 202 |
301. Cogged joints | 203 |
302. Anchor joint | 203 |
303. Deep anchor joint | 204 |
[Pg 1]
[Pg 1]
CARPENTRY
A PRACTICAL COURSE, WHICH TELLS IN CONCISE AND SIMPLE FORM "HOW TO DO IT"
INTRODUCTORY
Carpentry is the oldest of the arts, and it has been said that the knowledge necessary to make a good carpenter fits one for almost any trade or occupation requiring the use of tools. The hatchet, the saw, and the plane are the three primal implements of the carpenter. The value is in knowing how to use them.
Carpentry is the oldest craft, and people say that the skills needed to be a good carpenter prepare you for almost any job that involves using tools. The hatchet, the saw, and the plane are the three basic tools for a carpenter. The important thing is knowing how to use them.
The institution of Manual Training Schools everywhere is but a tardy recognition of the value of systematic training in the use of tools. There is no branch of industry which needs such diversification, in order to become efficient.
The establishment of Manual Training Schools is just a delayed acknowledgment of the importance of organized training in using tools. No industry requires such variety to achieve efficiency.
The skill of the blacksmith is centered in his ability to forge, to weld, and to temper; that of the machinist depends upon the callipered dimensions of his product; the painter in his taste for harmony; the mason on his ability to cut the stone accurately; and the plasterer to produce a uniform surface. But the carpenter must, in order to be an expert, combine all these qualifications, [Pg 2] in a greater or less degree, and his vocation may justly be called the King of Trades. Rightly, therefore, it should be cultivated in order to learn the essentials of manual training work.
The blacksmith's skill lies in his ability to forge, weld, and temper; the machinist's expertise is based on the precise measurements of his products; the painter relies on his sense of harmony; the mason's skill is in his ability to cut stone accurately; and the plasterer focuses on creating a smooth surface. However, in order to be an expert, the carpenter must combine all these skills to varying degrees, and his trade can rightly be considered the King of Trades. Therefore, it should be properly developed to understand the fundamentals of manual training work. [Pg 2]
But there is another feature of the utmost importance and value, which is generally overlooked, and on which there is placed too little stress, even in many of the manual training schools. The training of the mind has been systematized so as to bring into operation the energies of all the brain cells. Manual training to be efficient should, at the same time, be directed into such channels as will most widely stimulate the muscular development of the child, while at the same time cultivating his mind.
But there’s another incredibly important aspect that is often ignored and doesn’t get enough emphasis, even in many vocational training schools. The training of the mind has been organized to activate all the brain cells. For manual training to be effective, it should also be guided in ways that broadly encourage the child’s muscle development while also nurturing their mind.
There is no trade which offers such a useful field as carpentry. It may be said that the various manual operations bring into play every muscle of the body.
There’s no trade that offers such a practical field as carpentry. It can be said that the different hands-on tasks engage every muscle in the body.
The saw, the plane, the hammer, the chisel, each requires its special muscular energy. The carpenter, unlike the blacksmith, does not put all his brawn into his shoulders, nor develop his torso at the expense of his other muscles, like the mason. It may also be said that, unlike most other occupations, the carpenter has both out-of-door and indoor exercise, so that he is at all times able to follow his occupation, summer or [Pg 3] winter, rain or shine; and this also further illustrates the value of this branch of endeavor as a healthful recreation.
The saw, the plane, the hammer, the chisel—each requires its own specific strength. The carpenter, unlike the blacksmith, doesn’t just bulk up his shoulders, nor does he develop his upper body at the expense of other muscles like the mason does. It can also be said that, unlike most other jobs, the carpenter gets exercise both outdoors and indoors, allowing him to work regardless of the season or the weather. This also highlights the benefits of this profession as a healthy form of recreation. [Pg 3]
It is the aim of this book to teach boys the primary requirements—not to generalize—but to show how to prepare and how to do the work; what tools and materials to use; and in what manner the tools used may be made most serviceable, and used most advantageously.
It is the goal of this book to teach boys the essential skills—not to generalize—but to demonstrate how to prepare and complete the work; which tools and materials to use; and how to make the tools most effective and used to their best advantage.
It would be of no value to describe and illustrate how a bracket is made; or how the framework of a structure is provided with mortises and tenons in order to hold it together. The boy must have something as a base which will enable him to design his own creations, and not be an imitator; his mind must develop with his body. It is the principal aim of this book to give the boy something to think about while he is learning how to bring each individual part to perfection.
It wouldn’t be helpful to explain or show how a bracket is made or how the framework of a structure is joined with mortises and tenons to keep it sturdy. The boy needs a foundation that lets him create his own designs instead of just copying others; his mind needs to grow along with his body. The main goal of this book is to provide the boy with ideas to consider while he learns how to perfect each part.
If the boy understands that there is a principle underlying each structural device; that there is a reason for making certain things a definite way, he is imbued with an incentive which will sooner or later develop into an initiative of his own.
If the boy realizes that there’s a principle behind each structural element; that there’s a reason for doing things in a specific way, he gains a motivation that will eventually grow into his own initiative.
It is this phase in the artisan's life which determines whether he will be merely a machine or an intelligent organism.
It is this phase in the artisan's life that decides whether he will be just a machine or a thinking being.
This work puts together in a simple, concise [Pg 4] form, not only the fundamentals which every mechanic should learn to know, but it defines every structural form used in this art, and illustrates all terms it is necessary to use in the employment of carpentry. A full chapter is devoted to drawings practically applied. All terms are diagrammed and defined, so that the mind may readily grasp the ideas involved.
This book brings together the basics that every mechanic should understand in a straightforward, concise way. It defines every structural form used in this profession and explains all the terms necessary for carpentry. A complete chapter focuses on practical drawings. All terms are illustrated and defined to help readers easily understand the concepts involved.
Finally, it will be observed that every illustration has been specially drawn for this book. We have not adopted the plan usually followed in books of this class, of taking stock illustrations of manufacturers' tools and devices, nor have we thought it advisable to take a picture of a tool or a machine and then write a description around it. We have illustrated the book to explain "how to do the work"; also, to teach the boy what the trade requires, and to give him the means whereby he may readily find the form of every device, tool, and structure used in the art.
Finally, you'll notice that every illustration has been specially created for this book. We haven’t followed the typical approach seen in books like this, which often use stock images of manufacturers’ tools and devices. Instead, we didn’t just take photos of tools or machines and write descriptions around them. We’ve illustrated this book to explain "how to do the work"; to teach the reader what the trade requires, and to provide them with the resources to easily find the shapes of every device, tool, and structure used in the field.
[Pg 5]
[Pg 5]
CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
CHAPTER I
TOOLS AND THEIR USES
Knowledge of Tools.—A knowledge of tools and their uses is the first and most important requirement. The saw, the plane, the hatchet and the hammer are well known to all boys; but how to use them, and where to use the different varieties of each kind of tool, must be learned, because each tool grew out of some particular requirement in the art. These uses will now be explained.
Tool Knowledge.—Understanding tools and how to use them is the most essential requirement. The saw, plane, hatchet, and hammer are familiar to all boys; however, knowing how to use them and when to apply the different types of each tool is crucial, as each tool was created to meet a specific need in the craft. These uses will now be explained.
A Full Kit of Tools.—A kit of tools necessary for doing any plain work should embrace the following:
A complete set of tools.—A toolkit for basic tasks should include the following:
1. A Hatchet.
2. A Claw Hammer—two sizes preferred.
3. Cross-cut Saw, 20 inches long.
4. Rip Saw, 24 inches long.
5. Wooden Mallet.
6. Jack Plane.
7. Smoothing Plane.
8. Compass Saw.
9. Brace.
10. Bits for Brace, ranging from ¼ inch to 1 inch diameter.
11. Several small Gimlets.
12. Square.
13. Compass.
14. Draw-knife.
15. Rule.
16. Two Gages.
17. Set of Firmer Chisels.
18. Two Mortising Chisels.
19. Small Back Saw.
20. Saw Clamps.
21. Miter Box.
22. Bevel Square.
23. Small Hand Square.
24. Pliers.
25. Pair of Awls.
26. Hand Clamps.
27. Set Files.
28. Glue Pot.
29. Oil Stone.
30. Grindstone.
31. Trusses.
32. Work Bench.
33. Plumb Bob.
34. Spirit Level.1. A Hatchet.
2. A Claw Hammer—two sizes recommended.
3. Cross-cut Saw, 20 inches long.
4. Rip Saw, 24 inches long.
5. Wooden Mallet.
6. Jack Plane.
7. Smoothing Plane.
8. Compass Saw.
9. Brace.
10. Bits for Brace, ranging from ¼ inch to 1 inch in diameter.
11. Several small Gimlets.
12. Square.
13. Compass.
14. Draw-knife.
15. Rule.
16. Two Gages.
17. Set of Firmer Chisels.
18. Two Mortising Chisels.
19. Small Back Saw.
20. Saw Clamps.
21. Miter Box.
22. Bevel Square.
23. Small Hand Square.
24. Pliers.
25. Pair of Awls.
26. Hand Clamps.
27. Set Files.
28. Glue Pot.
29. Oil Stone.
30. Grindstone.
31. Trusses.
32. Work Bench.
33. Plumb Bob.
34. Spirit Level.
[Pg 6]
[Pg 6]
The Hatchet.—The hatchet should be ground with a bevel on each side, and not on one side only, as is customary with a plasterer's lathing hatchet, because the blade of the hatchet is used for trimming off the edges of boards. Unless ground off with a bevel on both sides it cannot be controlled to cut accurately. A light hatchet is preferable to a heavy one. It should never be used for nailing purposes, except in emergencies. The pole of the hammer—that part which is generally used to strike the nail with—is required in order to properly balance the hatchet when used for trimming material.
The Hatchet.—The hatchet should be sharpened with a bevel on both sides, not just one, like a plasterer's lathing hatchet, because the blade of the hatchet is used for trimming the edges of boards. If it isn’t sharpened with a bevel on both sides, it won’t be able to cut accurately. A lightweight hatchet is better than a heavy one. It should only be used for nailing in emergencies. The pole of the hammer—the part used to hit the nail—is needed to properly balance the hatchet when trimming material.
The Claw Hammer.—This is the proper tool for driving nails and for drawing them out. Habits should be formed with the beginner, which will be of great service as the education proceeds. [Pg 7] One of these habits is to persist in using the tool for the purpose for which it was made. The expert workman (and he becomes expert because of it) makes the hammer do its proper work; and so with every other tool.
The Claw Hammer.—This is the right tool for driving nails and pulling them out. Beginners should develop habits that will be very helpful as their skills grow. [Pg 7] One of these habits is to consistently use the tool for its intended purpose. The skilled worker (and they become skilled because of this) uses the hammer for its proper job; the same goes for every other tool.
About Saws.—There are four well-defined kinds. First, a long, flat saw, for cross-cutting. Second, a slightly larger saw for ripping purposes. Third, a back saw, with a rib on the rear edge to hold the blade rigid, used for making tenons; and, fourth, a compass or keyhole saw.
About Saws.—There are four distinct types. First, a long, flat saw for cross-cutting. Second, a slightly larger saw for ripping. Third, a back saw, which has a rib on the back edge to keep the blade steady, used for making tenons; and fourth, a compass or keyhole saw.
>[Pg 8]
>[Pg 8]
Cross-cuts.—The difference between a cross-cut and a rip saw is, that in the latter the teeth have less pitch and are usually larger than in the cross-cut saw. The illustrations (Figs. 13 and 14) will distinctly show the difference in the teeth. When a cross-cut saw is used for ripping along the grain of the wood, the teeth, if disposed at an angle, will ride over the grain or fiber of the wood, and refuse to take hold or bite into the wood. On the other hand, if the rip saw is used for cross-cutting purposes, the saw kerf will be rough and jagged.
Crosscuts.—The difference between a cross-cut saw and a rip saw is that the teeth on a rip saw have a shallower angle and are usually larger than those on a cross-cut saw. The illustrations (Figs. 13 and 14) clearly show the difference in the teeth. When you use a cross-cut saw for ripping along the grain of the wood, the angled teeth will skip over the grain or fibers and won’t dig into the wood. Conversely, if you try to use a rip saw for cross-cutting, the cut will be rough and jagged.
The back saw is used almost exclusively for making tenons, and has uniformly fine teeth so as to give a smooth finish to the wood.
The back saw is mainly used for making tenons and has consistently fine teeth to provide a smooth finish to the wood.
Planes.—The plane may be called the æsthetic tool in the carpenter's kit. It is the most difficult tool to handle and the most satisfactory when thoroughly mastered. How to care for and [Pg 9] handle it will be referred to in a subsequent chapter. We are now concerned with its uses only. Each complete kit must have three distinct planes, namely, the jack plane, which is for taking off the rough saw print surface of the board. The short smoothing plane, which is designed to even up the inequalities made by the jack plane; and the long finishing plane, or fore plane, which is intended to straighten the edges of boards or of finished surfaces.
Airplanes.—The plane can be considered the aesthetic tool in the carpenter's toolbox. It’s the hardest tool to use but the most rewarding when you really get the hang of it. How to maintain and use it will be discussed in a later chapter. Right now, we're focusing on its applications only. Every complete kit needs three different planes: the jack plane, which removes the rough saw marks from the board; the short smoothing plane, meant to even out the imperfections left by the jack plane; and the long finishing plane, or fore plane, which is used to straighten the edges of boards or finish surfaces.
The Jack Plane.—This plane has the cutting edge of its blade ground so it is slightly curved (Fig. 6), because, as the bit must be driven out so it will take a deep bite into the rough surface of the wood, the curved cutting edge prevents the corner edges of the bit from digging into the planed surface.
The Jack Plane.—This plane has the blade's cutting edge shaped so that it’s slightly curved (Fig. 6). This design allows the blade to be pushed out deeply into the rough wood surface while preventing the corners of the blade from gouging the surface being planed.
On the other hand, the bits of the smoothing and finishing planes are ground straight across their cutting edges. In the foregoing we have not enumerated the different special planes, designed [Pg 10] to make beads, rabbets, tongues and grooves, but each type is fully illustrated, so that an idea may be obtained of their characteristics. (Fig. 6a).
On the other hand, the blades of the smoothing and finishing planes are sharpened straight across their cutting edges. In the previous sections, we haven’t listed the various specialized planes made for creating beads, rabbets, tongues, and grooves, but each type is fully illustrated, allowing for an understanding of their features. (Fig. 6a).
Gages.—One of the most valuable tools in the whole set is the gage, but it is, in fact, the least known. This is simply a straight bar, with a sharpened point projecting out on one side near its end, and having an adjustable sliding head or cheekpiece. This tool is indispensable in making mortises or tenons, because the sharpened steel point which projects from the side of the bar, serves to outline and define the edges of the mortises or tenons, so that the cutting line may readily be followed.
Gauges.—One of the most useful tools in the entire set is the gauge, but it's actually the least recognized. It's just a straight bar with a sharpened point sticking out on one side near the end, and it has an adjustable sliding head or cheekpiece. This tool is essential for making mortises or tenons, because the sharpened steel point that extends from the side of the bar helps outline and define the edges of the mortises or tenons, making it easy to follow the cutting line.
This is the most difficult tool to hold when in use, but that will be fully explained under its proper head. Each kit should have two, as in making mortises and tenons one gage is required for each side of the mortise or tenon.
This is the hardest tool to handle while using it, but that will be explained in detail later. Each kit should include two, as you need one gauge for each side of the mortise or tenon when making them.
Chisels.—Two kinds are found in every kit—one [Pg 11] called the firmer (Fig. 7) and the mortising chisel. The firmer has a flat body or blade, and a full set ranges in width from three-eighths of an inch to two inches. The sizes most desirable and useful are the one-half inch, the inch and the inch-and-a-half widths. These are used for trimming out cross grains or rebates for setting door locks and hinges and for numerous other uses where sharp-end tools are required.
Chisels.—There are two types in every kit—one called the firmer (Fig. 7) and the mortising chisel. The firmer has a flat body or blade, and the complete set ranges in width from three-eighths of an inch to two inches. The most desirable and useful sizes are the half inch, the one inch, and the one-and-a-half inch widths. These are used for trimming cross grains or making rebates for installing door locks and hinges, as well as for many other tasks where sharp-end tools are needed.
The Mortising Chisel.—The mortising chisel (Fig. 7a), on the other hand, is very narrow and thick, with a long taper down to the cutting edge. They are usually in such widths as to make them stock sizes for mortises. Never, under any circumstances, use a hammer or hatchet for driving chisels. The mallet should be used invariably.
The Mortising Chisel.—The mortising chisel (Fig. 7a) is narrow and thick, tapering down to the cutting edge. They typically come in widths that match standard sizes for mortises. Never, under any circumstances, use a hammer or hatchet to drive chisels. Always use a mallet.
Trusses.—There should be at least two, each three feet in length and twenty inches in height.
Trusses.—There should be at least two, each three feet long and twenty inches tall.
Saw Clamps.—These are necessary adjuncts, and should be made of hard wood, perfectly [Pg 12] straight and just wide enough to take in the narrow back saw. The illustration shows their shape and form.
Saw Clamps.—These are essential tools, and they should be made from hardwood, completely straight, and just wide enough to accommodate the narrow back saw. The illustration shows their shape and design. [Pg 12]
The Grindstones.—It is better to get a first-class stone, which may be small and rigged up with a foot treadle. A soft, fine-grained stone is most serviceable, and it should have a water tray, and never be used excepting with plenty of water.
The Grindstones.—It's better to get a high-quality stone, even if it's small and set up with a foot pedal. A soft, fine-grained stone is the most useful, and it should have a water tray, and it should only be used with plenty of water.
An Oil Stone is as essential as a grindstone. For giving a good edge to tools it is superior to a water stone. It should be provided with a top, and covered when not in use, to keep out dust [Pg 13] and grit. These are the little things that contribute to success and should be carefully observed.
A Whetstone is just as important as a grindstone. For sharpening tools effectively, it’s better than a water stone. It should have a cover and be stored properly when not in use to keep out dust [Pg 13] and grit. These small details are what lead to success and should be paid attention to.
The Miter Box.—This should be 14 inches long and 3" by 3" inside, made of hard wood ¾" thick. The sides should be nailed to the bottom, as shown.
The Miter Box.—This should be 14 inches long and 3" by 3" inside, made of hardwood ¾" thick. The sides should be nailed to the bottom, as shown.
The Work Bench.—In its proper place we show in detail the most approved form of work bench, fitted with a tool rack to hold all the tools, conveniently arranged. In this chapter we are more particularly concerned with the uses of tools than their construction; and we impress on boys the necessity of having a place for everything, and that every tool should be kept in its proper place. A carpenter's shop filled with chips, shavings and other refuse is not a desirable place for the indiscriminate placing of tools. If correct habits are formed at the outset, by carefully putting each tool in its place after using, it will save many an hour of useless hunting and annoyance.
The Workspace.—Here, we show the most recommended design for a workbench, equipped with a tool rack to keep all the tools neatly organized. In this chapter, we focus more on how to use the tools rather than how to make them. We emphasize to boys the importance of having a designated spot for everything and that each tool should go back to its proper place. A carpenter's shop cluttered with wood chips, shavings, and other debris is not a suitable place for randomly placing tools. If good habits are formed from the beginning by carefully returning each tool after use, it will save a lot of time and frustration in searching for them later.
One of the most important things in laying off [Pg 14] work, for instance, on trusses, is the disposition of the saw and square. Our illustration shows each truss with side cleats, which will permit the user temporarily to deposit the saw or the square so that it will be handy, and at the same time be out of the way of the work and prevent either of the tools from being thrown to the floor.
One of the key factors in working with trusses is how you position the saw and square. Our illustration shows each truss with side cleats, which allow the user to temporarily place the saw or square so that it’s easily accessible while keeping it out of the way of the work, preventing either tool from falling to the floor.
In the same way, and for the same purpose, the work bench has temporary holding cleats at the end and a shelf in front, which are particularly desirable, because either a saw or a square is an encumbrance on a work bench while the work is being assembled, and tools of this kind should not be laid flat on a working surface, nor should they be stood in a leaning position against a truss or work bench.
In the same way, and for the same purpose, the workbench has temporary holding cleats at the end and a shelf in front, which are especially useful because having a saw or a square on a workbench while assembling can be a hassle. Tools like these shouldn’t be placed flat on the working surface, nor should they be leaned against a truss or workbench.
Strictly observe these fundamentals—Never place a tool with the cutting edge toward you. Always have the racks or receptacles so made that the handle may be seized. Don't put a tool with an exposed cutting edge above or below another tool in such a manner that the hand or the tool you are handling can come into contact with the edge. Never keep the nail or screw boxes above the work bench. They should always be kept to one side, to prevent, as much as possible, the bench from becoming a depository for nails. Keep the top of the bench free from tools. Always [Pg 15] keep the planes on a narrow sub-shelf at the rear of the bench.
Always follow these basic rules—Never place a tool with the cutting edge facing you. Make sure the racks or containers are designed so you can easily grab the handle. Don’t put a tool with a sharp edge above or below another tool in a way that your hand or the tool you’re using could touch the edge. Never keep nail or screw boxes above the workbench. They should always be kept to one side to help prevent the bench from becoming a catch-all for nails. Keep the top of the bench clear of tools. Always keep the planes on a narrow shelf at the back of the bench. [Pg 15]
If order was Heaven's first law, it is a good principle to apply it in a workman's shop, and its observance will form a habit that will soon become a pleasure to follow.
If order was Heaven's first rule, it's a good idea to apply it in a worker's shop, and following it will create a habit that will soon become enjoyable.
[Pg 16]
[Pg 16]
CHAPTER II
HOW TO GRIND AND SHARPEN TOOLS
Care of Tools.—Dull tools indicate the character of the workman. In an experience of over forty years, I have never known a good workman to keep poorly sharpened tools. While it is true that the capacity to sharpen tools can be acquired only by practice, correct habits at the start will materially assist. In doing this part of the artisan's work, it should be understood that there is a right as well as a wrong way.
Tool Maintenance.—Dull tools reflect the quality of the worker. In my more than forty years of experience, I've never encountered a skilled worker who used poorly sharpened tools. While it's true that you can only get better at sharpening tools through practice, starting with the right habits will make a significant difference. When handling this part of the craftsman's work, it’s important to know that there’s a right way and a wrong way to do it.
There is a principle involved in the sharpening of every tool, which should be observed. A skilled artisan knows that there is a particular way to grind the bits of each plane; that the manner of setting a saw not only contributes to its usefulness, but will materially add to the life of the saw; that a chisel cannot be made to do good work unless its cutting edge is square and at the right working angle.
There’s a principle in sharpening every tool that should be followed. A skilled craftsman understands that there’s a specific method to grind the bits of each plane; that how a saw is set not only affects its effectiveness but also significantly extends its lifespan; that a chisel can’t perform well unless its cutting edge is perfectly squared and at the correct working angle.
First Requisite.—A beginner should never attempt a piece of work until he learns how the different tools should be sharpened, or at least learn the principle involved. Practice will make perfect.
First Requirement.—A beginner shouldn't try to do a task until they know how to sharpen the various tools or, at the very least, understand the underlying principles. Practice makes perfect.
[Pg 17] Saws.—As the saw is such an important part of the kit, I shall devote some space to the subject. First, as to setting the saw. The object of this is to make the teeth cut a wider kerf than the thickness of the blade, and thereby cause the saw to travel freely. A great many so-called "saw sets" are found in the market, many of them built on wrong principles, as will be shown, and these are incapable of setting accurately.
[Pg 17] Saws.—Since the saw is such a crucial part of the toolkit, I’ll take some time to discuss it. First, let's talk about setting the saw. The aim here is to adjust the teeth so they cut a wider groove than the thickness of the blade, allowing the saw to move freely. There are many so-called "saw sets" available, but a lot of them are based on incorrect principles, as will be explained, and these are unable to set accurately.
How to Set.—To set a saw accurately, that is, to drive out each tooth the same distance, is the first requirement, and the second is to bend out the whole tooth, and not the point only.
How to Setup.—To set a saw accurately, which means to make sure each tooth is pushed out the same distance, is the first requirement, and the second is to bend out the entire tooth, not just the tip.
In the illustration (Fig. 10), the point is merely bent out. This is wrong. The right way is shown [Pg 18] in Fig. 10a. The whole tooth is bent, showing the correct way of setting. The reasons for avoiding one way and following the other are: First, that if the point projects to one side, each point or tooth will dig into the wood, and produce tooth prints in the wood, which make a roughened surface. Second, that if there are inequalities in setting the teeth (as is sure to be the case when only the points are bent out), the most exposed points will first wear out, and thereby cause saw deterioration. Third, a saw with the points sticking out causes a heavy, dragging cut, and means additional labor. Where the whole body of the tooth is bent, the saw will run smoothly and easily through the kerf and produce a smooth-cut surface.
In the illustration (Fig. 10), the point is just bent out. This is incorrect. The right way is shown in Fig. 10a. The entire tooth is bent, demonstrating the correct method of setting. The reasons for avoiding one method and using the other are: First, if the point sticks out to one side, each point or tooth will dig into the wood, creating tooth prints that roughen the surface. Second, if there are inconsistencies in setting the teeth (which will definitely happen if only the points are bent out), the most exposed points will wear down first, leading to saw deterioration. Third, a saw with protruding points results in a heavy, dragging cut, requiring more effort. When the whole body of the tooth is bent, the saw will glide smoothly and easily through the kerf, creating a clean-cut surface.
Our illustration (Fig. 11) shows a very simple setting block, the principal merit of which is that any boy can make it, and in the use of which he cannot go wrong in setting a tooth.
Our illustration (Fig. 11) shows a very simple setting block, the main advantage of which is that any kid can make it, and when using it, they can't go wrong in setting a tooth.
Simple Saw Setter.—Take a block of wood, a 4 by 4 inch studding, four inches long. Get a [Pg 19] piece of metal one-half inch thick and two inches square. Have a blacksmith or machinist bore a quarter-inch hole through it in the center and countersink the upper side so it may be securely fastened in a mortise in the block, with its upper side flush with the upper surface of the block. Now, with a file, finish off one edge, going back for a quarter of an inch, the angle at A to be about 12 degrees.
Saw Setter.—Take a block of wood, a 4 by 4 inch piece, four inches long. Get a piece of metal that’s half an inch thick and two inches square. Have a blacksmith or machinist drill a quarter-inch hole through the center and countersink the top side so it can be securely attached in a mortise in the block, with the top flush with the block's surface. Now, use a file to smooth one edge, going back a quarter of an inch, with the angle at A being about 12 degrees. [Pg 19]
Filing Angles.—In its proper place will be shown how you may easily calculate and measure degrees in work of this kind. Fig. 12 shows an approximation to the right angle. B, B (Fig. 11) should be a pair of wooden pegs, driven into the wooden block on each side of the metal piece. The teeth of the saw rest against the pegs so that they serve as a guide or a gage, and the teeth of the saw, therefore, project over the inclined part (B) of the metal block. Now, with [Pg 20] an ordinary punch and a hammer, each alternate tooth may be driven down until it rests flat on the inclined face (A), so that it is impossible to set the teeth wrongly. When you glance down the end of a properly set saw, you will see a V-shaped channel, and if you will place a needle in the groove and hold the saw at an angle, the needle will travel down without falling out.
Filing Angles.—In its proper place, you’ll see how to easily calculate and measure degrees for this type of work. Fig. 12 shows an approximation of a right angle. B, B (Fig. 11) should be a pair of wooden pegs, driven into the wooden block on either side of the metal piece. The teeth of the saw rest against the pegs, serving as a guide or gauge, so the saw’s teeth project over the inclined part (B) of the metal block. Now, using a regular punch and a hammer, you can drive down each alternate tooth until it lies flat on the inclined face (A), making it impossible to set the teeth incorrectly. When you look down the end of a properly set saw, you’ll see a V-shaped channel, and if you place a needle in the groove and hold the saw at an angle, the needle will slide down without falling out.
Filing.—The next step is the filing. Two things must be observed: the pitch and the angle. By pitch is meant the inclination of the teeth. Note the illustration (Fig. 13), which shows the teeth of a rip saw. You will see at A that the pitch of the tooth is at right angles to the edge of the saw. In Fig. 14, which shows the teeth of a cross-cut saw, the pitch (B) is about 10 degrees off. The teeth of the rip saw are also larger than those of the cross-cut.
Submitting.—The next step is filing. There are two things to keep in mind: the pitch and the angle. The pitch refers to the angle of the teeth. Check out the illustration (Fig. 13), which shows the teeth of a rip saw. You’ll notice at A that the pitch of the tooth is perpendicular to the edge of the saw. In Fig. 14, which shows the teeth of a cross-cut saw, the pitch (B) is about 10 degrees off. The teeth of the rip saw are also larger than those of the cross-cut.
The Angle of Filing.—By angle is meant the cutting position of the file. In Fig. 12, the lines [Pg 21] B represent the file disposed at an angle of 12 degrees, not more, for a rip saw. For a cross-cut the angle of the file may be less.
The Filing Angle.—The angle refers to the cutting position of the file. In Fig. 12, the lines [Pg 21] B show the file positioned at an angle of 12 degrees, no more, for a rip saw. For a cross-cut, the angle of the file can be smaller.
Saw Clamps.—You may easily make a pair of saw clamps as follows:
Saw clamps.—You can easily make a pair of saw clamps like this:
Take two pieces of hard wood, each three inches wide, seven-eighths of an inch thick, and equal in length to the longest saw. Bevel one edge of each as shown in A (Fig. 15), so as to leave an edge (B) about one-eighth of an inch thick. At one end cut away the corner on the side opposite the bevel, as shown at C, so the clamps will fit on the saw around the saw handle.
Take two pieces of hardwood, each three inches wide, seven-eighths of an inch thick, and the same length as the longest saw. Bevel one edge of each as shown in A (Fig. 15), leaving an edge (B) that is about one-eighth of an inch thick. At one end, cut away the corner on the side opposite the bevel, as shown at C, so the clamps will fit onto the saw around the handle.
When the saw is placed between these clamps and held together by the jaws of the vise, you are ready for the filing operation. Observe the following filing suggestions: Always hold the file horizontal or level. In filing, use the whole length of the file. Do the work by a slow, firm sweep.
When you place the saw between these clamps and secure it with the vise's jaws, you're all set for filing. Keep these filing tips in mind: always hold the file horizontally or level. Use the entire length of the file while working. Move slowly and steadily.
Do not file all of the teeth along the saw at one operation, but only the alternate teeth, so as to [Pg 22] keep the file at the same angle, and thus insure accuracy; then turn the saw and keep the file constantly at one angle for the alternate set of teeth.
Do not file all the teeth on the saw at once, but only the alternate teeth to maintain the same angle of the file, which ensures accuracy; then turn the saw and keep the file at the same angle for the other set of alternate teeth. [Pg 22]
Give the same number of strokes, and exert the same pressure on the file for each tooth, to insure uniformity. Learn also to make a free, easy and straight movement back and forth with the file.
Give the same number of strokes and apply the same pressure on the file for each tooth to ensure consistency. Also, learn to make a smooth, easy, and straight movement back and forth with the file.
The File.—In order to experiment with the filing motion, take two blocks of wood, and try surfacing them off with a file. When you place the two filed surfaces together after the first trial both will be convex, because the hands, in filing, unless you exert the utmost vigilance, will assume a crank-like movement. The filing test is so to file the two blocks that they will fit tightly together without rolling on each other. Before shaping and planing machines were invented, machinists were compelled to plane down and accurately finish off surfaces with a file.
The Document.—To practice filing, take two blocks of wood and try smoothing them with a file. When you press the two filed surfaces together after the first attempt, they will both be curved, because if you're not extremely careful while filing, your hands will tend to move in a crooked manner. The goal of the filing exercise is to shape the two blocks so they fit snugly together without rocking against each other. Before the invention of shaping and planing machines, machinists had to smooth and finish surfaces precisely using a file.
In using the files on saws, however small the file may be, one hand should hold the handle and the other hand the tip of the file.
In using files on saws, no matter how small the file is, one hand should hold the handle while the other hand holds the tip of the file.
A file brush should always be kept on hand, as it pays to preserve files by cleaning them.
A file brush should always be available, as it’s worth it to keep files clean and in good condition.
The Grindstone.—As most of the tools require a grindstone for sharpening purposes, an illustration is given as a guide, with a diagram to show the proper grinding angle. In Fig. 16 the upright [Pg 23] (A) of the frame serves as a line for the eye, so that if the point of the tool is brought to the sight line, and the tool (C) held level, you will always be able to maintain the correct angle. There is no objection to providing a rest, for instance, like the cross bars (D, D), but the artisan disdains such contrivances, and he usually avoids them for two reasons: First, because habit enables him to hold the tool horizontally; and, second, by holding the tool firmly in the hand he has better control of it. There is only one thing which can be said in favor of a rest, and [Pg 24] that is, the stone may be kept truer circumferentially, as all stones have soft spots or sides.
The Grindstone.—Since most tools need a grindstone for sharpening, an illustration is provided as a guide, along with a diagram to indicate the correct grinding angle. In Fig. 16, the upright [Pg 23] (A) of the frame acts as a sight line, so if you align the point of the tool with the sight line and hold the tool (C) level, you can consistently maintain the right angle. There’s nothing wrong with using a rest, like the cross bars (D, D), but skilled workers tend to avoid such aids for two reasons: First, their experience allows them to hold the tool horizontally; and second, gripping the tool firmly gives them better control. The only advantage of using a rest is that it helps keep the stone more balanced around its circumference, as all stones have soft spots or uneven areas. [Pg 24]
In the Use of Grindstones.—There are certain things to avoid and to observe in the use of stones. Never use one spot on the stone, however narrow the tool may be. Always move the tool from side to side. Never grind a set of narrow tools successively. If you have chisels to grind intersperse their grinding with plane bits, hatchet or other broad cutting tools, so as to prevent the stone from having grooves therein. Never use a tool on a stone unless you have water in the tray.
Using Grindstones.—There are specific things to avoid and guidelines to follow when using stones. Never use the same spot on the stone, no matter how narrow the tool is. Always move the tool from side to side. Don’t grind a set of narrow tools one after another. If you need to grind chisels, alternate their grinding with wider tools like plane bits or hatchets to prevent grooves from forming on the stone. Also, never use a tool on the stone unless there is water in the tray.
Correct Way to Hold Tool for Grinding.—There is a correct way to hold each tool; see illustration (Fig. 17). The left hand should grasp the tool firmly, near the sharp edge, as shown, and the right hand should loosely hold the tool behind [Pg 25] the left hand. There is a reason for this which will be apparent after you grind a few tools. The firm grasp of the left hand gives you absolute control of the blade, so it cannot turn, and when inequalities appear in the grindstone, the rigid hold will prevent the blade from turning, and thus enable you to correct the inequalities of the stone. Bear in mind, the stone should be taken care of just as much as the tools. An experienced workman is known by the condition of his tools, and the grindstone is the best friend he has among his tools.
Proper Method for Holding a Grinding Tool.—There’s a right way to hold each tool; see illustration (Fig. 17). Your left hand should grip the tool firmly near the sharp edge, as shown, while your right hand should hold the tool loosely behind the left hand. There’s a reason for this that will become clear after you grind a few tools. The firm grip of your left hand gives you complete control of the blade, so it doesn’t rotate, and when there are imperfections in the grindstone, the steady hold will prevent the blade from turning, allowing you to fix those imperfections. Remember, the stone needs to be cared for just as much as the tools. A skilled craftsman is recognized by the condition of his tools, and the grindstone is his best ally among them.
Incorrect Way to Hold Tool for Grinding.—The incorrect way of holding a tool is shown in Fig. 18. This, I presume, is the universal way in which the novice takes the tool. It is wrong for the reason that the thumbs of both hands are on top of the blade, and they serve as pivots on which the tool may turn. The result is that the corners of the tool will dig into the stone to a greater or less degree, particularly if it has a narrow blade, like a chisel.
Wrong Way to Hold a Tool for Grinding.—The wrong way to hold a tool is shown in Fig. 18. I assume this is how beginners typically take the tool. It’s incorrect because both thumbs are on top of the blade, acting as pivots that allow the tool to turn. This causes the corners of the tool to dig into the stone more than they should, especially if the blade is narrow, like a chisel.
Try the experiment of grinding a quarter-inch chisel by holding it the incorrect way; and then grasp it firmly with the left hand, and you will at once see the difference.
Try the experiment of grinding a quarter-inch chisel by holding it the wrong way; then grip it tightly with your left hand, and you'll immediately notice the difference.
The left hand serves both as a vise and as a [Pg 26] fulcrum, whereas the right hand controls the angle of the tool.
The left hand acts as both a clamp and a pivot point, while the right hand manages the angle of the tool. [Pg 26]
These remarks apply to all chisels, plane bits and tools of that character, but it is obvious that a drawknife, which is always held by the handles in grinding, and hatchets, axes and the like, cannot be held in the same manner.
These comments apply to all chisels, plane bits, and similar tools, but it's clear that a drawknife, which is always held by the handles during grinding, and hatchets, axes, and similar tools can't be held the same way.
A too common error is to press the tool too hard on the stone. This is wrong. Do not try to force the grinding.
A common mistake is putting too much pressure on the tool against the stone. This is incorrect. Don't try to force the grinding.
Then, again, it is the practice of some to turn the stone away from the tool. The stone should always move toward the tool, so as to prevent forming a feather edge.
Then again, some people tend to move the stone away from the tool. The stone should always move toward the tool to avoid creating a feather edge.
[Pg 27] The Plane.—Indiscriminate use of planes should be avoided. Never use the fore or smoothing planes on rough surfaces. The jack plane is the proper tool for this work. On the other hand, the fore plane should invariably be used for straightening the edges of boards, or for fine surfacing purposes. As the jack plane has its bit ground with a curved edge, it is admirably adapted for taking off the rough saw print surface.
[Pg 27] The Airplane.—You should avoid using planes too casually. Don't use fore or smoothing planes on rough surfaces. The jack plane is the right tool for that job. On the flip side, you should always use the fore plane for straightening the edges of boards or for fine surfacing. Since the jack plane has its blade shaped with a curved edge, it's great for removing the rough saw marks from the surface.
The Gage.—The illustration (Fig. 19) shows one of the most useful tools in the kit. It is used to scribe the thickness of the material which is to be dressed down, or for imprinting the edges of tenons and mortises. Two should be provided in every kit, for convenience.
The Gage.—The illustration (Fig. 19) shows one of the most useful tools in the kit. It's used to mark the thickness of the material that needs to be trimmed down, or for outlining the edges of tenons and mortises. You should have two in every kit for convenience.
The scribing point should be sharpened with a file, the point being filed to form a blade, which is at right angles to the bar, or parallel with the movable cheekpiece.
The scribing point should be sharpened with a file, shaping the point into a blade that is perpendicular to the bar or aligned with the adjustable cheekpiece.
Chisels.—I have already pointed out, in general, how to hold tools for grinding purposes, this description applying particularly to chisels, but several additional things may be added.
Chisel tools.—I've already mentioned, in general, how to hold tools for grinding, and this especially applies to chisels, but there are a few more things to add.
Always be careful to grind the chisel so its cutting edge is square with the side edge. This will be difficult at first, but you will see the value of this as you use the tool. For instance, in making [Pg 28] rebates for hinges, or recesses and mortises for locks, the tool will invariably run crooked, unless it is ground square.
Always be careful to sharpen the chisel so the cutting edge is square with the side edge. This might be tricky at first, but you'll appreciate it as you use the tool. For example, when creating rebates for hinges or recesses and mortises for locks, the tool will consistently go off track unless it's sharpened square. [Pg 28]
The chisel should never be struck with a hammer or metal instrument, as the metal pole or peon of the hammer will sliver the handle. The wooden mallet should invariably be used.
The chisel should never be hit with a hammer or metal tool, as the metal head of the hammer will splinter the handle. A wooden mallet should always be used.
General Observations.—If the workman will carefully observe the foregoing requirements he will have taken the most important steps in the knowledge of the art. If he permits himself to commence work without having his tools in first-class condition, he is trying to do work under circumstances where even a skilled workman is liable to fail.
General Insights.—If the worker pays close attention to the requirements outlined above, they will have taken the most crucial steps in mastering the craft. If they start working without ensuring their tools are in top-notch condition, they're putting themselves in a position where even an experienced worker could struggle.
Avoid making for yourself a lot of unnecessary work. The best artisans are those who try to find out and know which is the best tool, or how to make a tool for each requirement, but that tool, to be serviceable, must be properly made, and that means it must be rightly sharpened.
Avoid creating a lot of unnecessary work for yourself. The best craftsmen are those who seek to identify and understand the best tool, or how to create a tool for each specific need. However, that tool, to be effective, must be well-made, and that means it needs to be properly sharpened.
[Pg 29]
[Pg 29]
CHAPTER III
HOW TO HOLD AND HANDLE TOOLS
Observation may form part of each boy's lesson, but when it comes to the handling of tools, practice becomes the only available means of making a workman. Fifty years of observation would never make an observer an archer or a marksman, nor would it enable him to shoe a horse or to build a table.
Observation can be part of each boy's lesson, but when it comes to using tools, practice is the only way to become a skilled worker. Fifty years of observation would never turn someone into an archer or a marksman, nor would it help him shoe a horse or build a table.
It sometimes happens that an apprentice will, with little observation, seize a saw in the proper way, or hold a plane in the correct manner, and, in time, the watchful boy will acquire fairly correct habits. But why put in useless time and labor in order to gain that which a few well-directed hints and examples will convey?
It sometimes happens that an apprentice will, with little observation, grab a saw the right way, or hold a plane correctly, and, over time, the attentive boy will develop pretty good habits. But why waste time and effort to achieve what a few well-placed tips and examples could easily teach?
Tools are made and are used as short cuts toward a desired end. Before the saw was invented the knife was used laboriously to sever and shape the materials. Before planes were invented a broad, flat sharpened blade was used to smooth off surfaces. Holes were dug out by means of small chisels requiring infinite patience and time. Each succeeding tool proclaimed a shorter and an easier way to do a certain thing. [Pg 30] The man or boy who can make a new labor-saving tool is worthy of as much praise as the man who makes two blades of grass grow where one grew before.
Tools are created and used as shortcuts to achieve a goal. Before the saw was invented, people used knives to cut and shape materials, which was a lot of hard work. Before planes were available, a sharp flat blade was used to smooth surfaces. Holes were made using small chisels that required a lot of patience and time. Each new tool represented a quicker and easier way to accomplish a task. [Pg 30] A person, whether man or boy, who invents a new labor-saving tool deserves as much recognition as someone who makes two blades of grass grow where one grew before.
Let us now thoroughly understand how to hold and use each tool. That is half the value of the tool itself.
Let’s now fully understand how to hold and use each tool. That’s half the value of the tool itself.
The Saw.—With such a commonplace article as the saw, it might be assumed that the ordinary apprentice would look upon instruction with a smile of derision.
The Chainsaw.—With something as ordinary as a saw, one might think that the typical apprentice would view training with a smirk of contempt.
How to Start a Saw.—If the untried apprentice has such an opinion set him to work at the task of cutting off a board accurately on a line. He will generally make a failure of the attempt to start the saw true to the line, to say nothing of following the line so the kerf is true and square with the board.
How to Start a Chainsaw.—If the inexperienced apprentice thinks he can manage it, have him try cutting a board precisely along a line. He will usually struggle to start the saw accurately on the line, let alone keep it on track so that the kerf is straight and squared with the board.
How to Start on a Line.—The first mistake he makes is to saw on the line. This should never be done. The work should be so laid out that the saw kerf is on the discarded side of the material. The saw should cut alongside the line, and the line should not be obliterated in the cutting. Material must be left for trimming and finishing.
How to Begin on a Line.—The first mistake he makes is cutting on the line. This should never happen. The work should be set up so that the saw cut is on the waste side of the material. The saw should slice next to the line, and the line should not be erased while cutting. There must be some material left for trimming and finishing.
The First Stroke.—Now, to hold the saw in starting is the difficult task to the beginner. Once mastered it is simple and easy. The only time in [Pg 31] which the saw should be firmly held by the hand is during the initial cut or two; afterwards always hold the handle loosely. There is nothing so tiring as a tightly grasped saw. The saw has but one handle, hence it is designed to be used with one hand. Sometimes, with long and tiresome jobs, in ripping, two hands may be used, but one hand can always control a saw better than two hands.
The First Strike.—For beginners, the tough part is getting a grip on the saw at the start. Once you get it down, it’s simple and straightforward. You should only hold the saw tightly during the first couple of cuts; after that, keep a loose grip on the handle. Holding a saw tightly is exhausting. The saw has only one handle, so it's meant to be used with one hand. In some lengthy and tiring jobs, like ripping, you might use both hands, but one hand can always control the saw better than two.
The Starting Cut.—In order to make our understanding of the starting cut more explicit, we refer to Fig. 20, in which the thumb of the left hand is shown in the position of a guide—the end of the thumb being held up a sufficient distance to [Pg 32] clear the teeth. In this position you need not fear that the teeth of the saw (A) will ride up over the thumb if you have a firm grasp of the saw handle.
The Beginning Cut.—To clarify our understanding of the starting cut, we refer to Fig. 20, where the thumb of the left hand is positioned as a guide—the tip of the thumb is held at a height that keeps it clear of the teeth. In this position, you don't have to worry about the saw teeth (A) riding up over your thumb as long as you have a solid grip on the saw handle. [Pg 32]
The first stroke should be upwardly, not downwardly. While in the act of drawing up the saw you can judge whether the saw blade is held by the thumb gage in the proper position to cut along the mark, and when the saw moves downwardly for the first cut, you may be assured that the cut is accurate, or at the right place, and the thumb should be kept in its position until two or three cuts are made, and the work is then fairly started.
The first stroke should go up, not down. While you’re pulling the saw up, you can check if the saw blade is being held by the thumb gauge in the right spot to cut along the mark. When the saw moves down for the first cut, you can be confident that the cut is accurate and in the right place. Keep your thumb in position until you've made two or three cuts, and then the work will be well underway.
For Cross-cutting.—For ordinary cross-cutting the angle of the saw should be at 45 degrees. For ripping, the best results are found at less than 45 degrees, but you should avoid flattening down the angle. An incorrect as well as a correct angle are shown in Figs. 21 and 22.
For Cross-cutting.—For regular cross-cutting, the saw angle should be set at 45 degrees. For ripping, you'll get better results with an angle less than 45 degrees, but try not to make the angle too flat. Both the incorrect and correct angles are illustrated in Figs. 21 and 22.
Forcing a Saw.—Forcing a saw through the wood means a crooked kerf. The more nearly the saw is held at right angles to a board, the greater [Pg 33] is the force which must be applied to it by the hand to cause it to bite into the wood; and, on the other hand, if the saw is laid down too far, as shown in the incorrect way, it is a very difficult matter to follow the working line. Furthermore, it is a hard matter to control the saw so that it will cut squarely along the board, particularly when ripping. The eye must be the only guide in the disposition of the saw. Some boys make the saw run in one direction, and others cause it to lean the opposite way. After you have had some experience and know which way you lean, correct your habits by disposing the saw in the opposite direction.
Forcing a saw.—Pushing a saw through the wood results in a crooked cut. The closer you hold the saw at a right angle to the board, the more force you have to apply with your hand to make it cut into the wood. Conversely, if the saw is angled too much, as shown in the incorrect example, it becomes very hard to follow the cutting line. Additionally, it's challenging to keep the saw cutting straight along the board, especially when ripping. Your eye should be the only guide for positioning the saw. Some people make the saw tilt in one direction, while others angle it the opposite way. Once you gain some experience and recognize which way you tilt, adjust your habits by positioning the saw in the opposite direction.
The Stroke.—Make a long stroke, using the full blade of the saw. Don't acquire the "jerky" style of sawing. If the handle is held loosely, and the saw is at the proper angle, the weight of the saw, together with the placement of the handle on the saw blade, will be found sufficient to make the requisite cut at each stroke.
The Stroke.—Make a long stroke, using the entire blade of the saw. Avoid the "jerky" sawing style. If you hold the handle loosely and keep the saw at the right angle, the weight of the saw and the position of the handle on the blade will be enough to make the necessary cut with each stroke.
[Pg 34] You will notice that the handle of every saw is mounted nearest the back edge. (See Fig. 23.) The reason for so mounting it is, that as the cutting stroke is downward, the line of thrust is above the tooth line, and as this line is at an angle to the line of thrust, the tendency is to cause the saw teeth to dig into the wood.
[Pg 34] You'll notice that the handle of every saw is positioned closest to the back edge. (See Fig. 23.) The reason for this placement is that since the cutting motion goes downward, the line of force is above the tooth line. And because this line is angled to the line of force, it tends to make the saw teeth dig into the wood.
The Chinese Saw.—This saw is designed to saw with an upward cut, and the illustration (Fig. 24) shows the handle jutting out below the tooth line, in order to cause the teeth to dig into the material as the handle is drawn upwardly. Reference is made to these features to impress upon beginners the value of observation, and to demonstrate the reason for making each tool a particular way.
The Chinese saw.—This saw is made for cutting upward, and the illustration (Fig. 24) shows the handle extending below the tooth line, which helps the teeth grip the material as the handle is pulled up. These features are highlighted to emphasize the importance of observation for beginners and to explain why each tool is designed in a specific way.
[Pg 35] Things to Avoid.—Do not oscillate the saw as you draw it back and forth. This is unnecessary work, and shows impatience in the use of the tool. There is such an infinite variety of use for the different tools that there is no necessity for rendering the work of any particular tool, or tools, burdensome. Each in its proper place, handled intelligently, will become a pleasure, as well as a source of profit.
[Pg 35] Things to Avoid.—Don’t sway the saw as you move it back and forth. This adds extra effort and shows impatience with the tool. There are so many different ways to use the various tools that you don’t need to make the work of any specific tool feel difficult. When used correctly and in the right context, each tool can be enjoyable and beneficial.
The Plane.—The jack plane and the fore plane are handled with both hands, and the smoothing plane with one hand, but only when used for dressing the ends of boards. For other uses both hands are required.
The Airplane.—The jack plane and the fore plane are used with both hands, while the smoothing plane can be used with one hand, but only when trimming the ends of boards. For other tasks, both hands are necessary.
Angles for Holding Planes.—Before commencing to plane a board, always observe the direction in which the grain of the wood runs. This precaution will save many a piece of material, because if the jack plane is set deep it will run into the wood and cause a rough surface, which can [Pg 36] be cured only by an extra amount of labor in planing down.
Angles for Holding Planes.—Before you start planing a board, always check the direction of the wood grain. This simple step can save you a lot of material, because if the jack plane is set too deep, it will dig into the wood and create a rough surface, which can only be fixed by doing extra work to plane it down. [Pg 36]
Never move the jack plane or the smoothing plane over the work so that the body of the tool is in a direct line with the movement of the plane. It should be held at an angle of about 12 or 15 degrees (see Fig. 25). The fore plane should always be held straight with the movement of the plane, because the length of the fore plane body is used as a straightener for the surface to be finished.
Never move the jack plane or the smoothing plane across the workpiece with the body of the tool directly aligned with the plane's movement. It should be held at an angle of about 12 or 15 degrees (see Fig. 25). The fore plane should always be held straight in line with the movement of the plane, as the length of the fore plane body is used to straighten the surface that needs finishing.
Errors to Be Avoided.—Never draw back the plane with the bit resting on the board. This [Pg 37] simply wears out the tool, and if there should be any grit on the board it will be sure to ruin the bit. This applies particularly to the jack plane, but is bad practice with the others as well.
Mistakes to Avoid.—Never pull the plane back with the bit resting on the board. This [Pg 37] just wears out the tool, and if there's any grit on the board, it will definitely damage the bit. This is especially true for the jack plane, but it's poor practice with the others too.
A work bench is a receptacle for all kinds of dirt. Provide a special ledge or shelf for the planes, and be sure to put each plane there immediately after using.
A workbench collects all sorts of dirt. Create a dedicated ledge or shelf for the planes, and make sure to put each plane there right after you use it.
The Gage.—A man, who professed to be a carpenter, once told me that he never used a gage because he could not make it run straight. A few moments' practice convinced him that he never knew how to hold it. The illustration shows how properly to hold it, and the reason why it should so be held follows.
The Gauge.—A guy who claimed to be a carpenter once told me that he never used a gauge because he couldn't figure out how to make it run straight. After a little practice, he realized he just didn’t know how to hold it correctly. The illustration shows how to hold it properly, and the explanation for why it should be held that way follows.
You will observe (Fig. 26) that the hand grasps the stem of the gage behind the cheekpiece, so that the thumb is free to press against the side of the stem to the front of the cheekpiece.
You will see (Fig. 26) that the hand holds the stem of the gauge behind the cheekpiece, allowing the thumb to press against the side of the stem in front of the cheekpiece.
Holding the Gage.—The hand serves to keep the cheekpiece against the board, while the thumb pushes the gage forward. The hand must not, under any circumstances, be used to move the gage along. In fact, it is not necessary for the fingers to be clasped around the gage stem, if the forefinger presses tightly against the cheekpiece, since the thumb performs all the operation of moving it along. Naturally, the hand grasps the tool in [Pg 38] order to hold it down against the material, and to bring it back for a new cut.
Holding the Gage.—The hand keeps the cheekpiece against the board while the thumb pushes the gage forward. Under no circumstances should the hand be used to slide the gage along. In fact, the fingers don’t need to wrap around the gage stem if the forefinger presses firmly against the cheekpiece, since the thumb handles all the movement. Naturally, the hand holds the tool down against the material and pulls it back for a new cut. [Pg 38]
The Draw-knife.—It is difficult for the apprentice to become accustomed to handle this useful tool. It is much more serviceable than a hatchet for trimming and paring work. In applying it to the wood always have the tool at an angle with the board, so as to make a slicing cut. This is specially desirable in working close to a line, otherwise there is a liability of cutting over it.
The drawknife.—It's tough for the apprentice to get used to handling this useful tool. It's much more practical than a hatchet for trimming and paring tasks. When using it on wood, always hold the tool at an angle to the board to make a slicing cut. This is especially important when working near a line; otherwise, you might cut beyond it.
This knife requires a firm grasp—firmness of hold is more important than strength in using. The flat side is used wholly for straight edges, and the beveled side for concave surfaces. It is the intermediate tool between the hatchet and the plane, as it has the characteristics of both those tools. It is an ugly, dangerous tool, more to be feared when lying around than when in use. Put it religiously on a rack which protects the entire cutting edge. Keep it off the bench.
This knife needs a strong grip—how tightly you hold it matters more than your strength while using it. The flat side is meant for straight edges, and the beveled side is for curved surfaces. It serves as the middle ground between a hatchet and a plane, combining features of both tools. It's an unattractive and potentially dangerous tool, more hazardous when it’s just lying around than when it's actually being used. Always place it securely on a rack that protects the whole cutting edge. Keep it off the bench.
[Pg 39]
[Pg 39]
CHAPTER IV
HOW TO DESIGN ARTICLES
Fundamentals of Designing.—A great deal of the pleasure in making articles consists in creative work. This means, not that you shall design some entirely new article, but that its general form, or arrangement of parts, shall have some new or striking feature.
Design Basics.—A lot of the joy in creating items comes from the creative process. This doesn't mean you have to invent something completely new, but rather that the overall shape or layout of its parts should have some fresh or eye-catching element.
A new design in any art does not require a change in all its parts. It is sufficient that there shall be an improvement, either in some particular point, as a matter of utility, or some change in an artistic direction. A manufacturer in putting out a new chair, or a plow, or an automobile, adds some striking characteristic. This becomes his talking point in selling the article.
A new design in any art doesn’t need to change everything. It's enough for there to be an improvement, either in a specific aspect for practical use or a shift in style. When a manufacturer releases a new chair, a plow, or a car, they incorporate a standout feature. This becomes their key selling point.
The Commercial Instinct.—It is not enough that the boy should learn to make things correctly, and as a matter of pastime and pleasure. The commercial instinct is, after all, the great incentive, and should be given due consideration.
The Business Mindset.—It's not enough for the boy to learn how to make things properly just for fun and enjoyment. The commercial instinct is, ultimately, a major motivation and should be taken seriously.
It would be impossible, in a book of this kind, to do more than to give the fundamental principles necessary in designing, and to direct the mind [Pg 40] solely to essentials, leaving the individual to build tip for himself.
It would be impossible, in a book like this, to do more than present the basic principles needed for design and to focus on the essentials, allowing the individual to build on their own. [Pg 40]
First Requirements for Designing.—First, then, let us see what is necessary to do when you intend to set about making an article. Suppose we fix our minds upon a table as the article selected. Three things are necessary to know: First, the use to which it is to be put; second, the dimensions; and, third, the material required.
Designing Requirements Checklist.—First, let’s look at what you need to consider when you plan to create an item. Let’s say we choose a table as our item. There are three important things to know: First, what it will be used for; second, the size; and third, the materials needed.
Assuming it to be the ordinary table, and the dimensions fixed, we may conclude to use soft pine, birch or poplar, because of ease in working. There are no regulation dimensions for tables, except as to height, which is generally uniform, and usually 30 inches. As to the length and width, you will be governed by the place where it is to be used.
Assuming it’s the typical table and the dimensions are set, we can choose soft pine, birch, or poplar because they're easy to work with. There aren’t any standard dimensions for tables, except for the height, which is usually consistent at around 30 inches. For the length and width, you'll need to consider where the table will be used.
If the table top is to have dimensions, say, of 36" × 48", you may lay out the framework six inches less each way, thus giving you a top overhang of three inches, which is the usual practice.
If the tabletop is going to be 36" × 48", you can set up the framework six inches smaller in each direction, which will give you a three-inch overhang on each side, and that’s the typical approach.
Conventional Styles.—Now, if you wish to depart from the conventional style of making a table you may make variations in the design. For instance, the Chippendale style means slender legs and thin top. It involves some fanciful designs in the curved outlines of the top, and in the crook [Pg 41] of the legs. Or if, on the other hand, the Mission type is preferred, the overhang of the top is very narrow; the legs are straight and heavy, and of even size from top to bottom; and the table top is thick and nearly as broad as it is long. Such furniture has the appearance of massiveness; it is easily made and most serviceable.
Traditional Styles.—If you want to move away from the traditional way of making a table, you can vary the design. For example, the Chippendale style features slender legs and a thin top, with some playful designs in the curved edges of the top and the bends of the legs. On the other hand, if you prefer the Mission style, the top has a very narrow overhang, the legs are straight and sturdy, and they maintain the same width from top to bottom; the table top is thick and nearly as wide as it is long. This type of furniture looks solid, is easy to make, and is very practical. [Pg 41]
Mission Style.—The Mission style of architecture also lends itself to the making of chairs and other articles of furniture. A chair is, probably, the most difficult piece of household furniture to make, because strength is required. In this type soft wood may be used, as the large legs and back pieces are easily provided with mortises and tenons, affording great rigidity when completed. In designing, therefore, you may see how the material itself becomes an important factor.
Mission Style.—The Mission style of architecture also works well for creating chairs and other pieces of furniture. A chair is probably the most challenging piece of household furniture to make because it needs to be strong. In this style, soft wood can be used since the large legs and back pieces can easily be fitted with mortises and tenons, providing great stability when finished. In designing, you can see how the material itself plays a crucial role.
Cabinets.—In the making of cabinets, sideboards, dressers and like articles, the ingenious boy will find a wonderful field for designing ability, because in these articles fancy alone dictates the sizes and the dimensions of the parts. Not so with chairs and tables. The imagination plays an important part even in the making of drawers, to say nothing of placing them with an eye to convenience and artistic effect.
Cabinets.—When it comes to making cabinets, sideboards, dressers, and similar items, any creative boy will discover a fantastic opportunity to showcase his design skills, as in these pieces, creativity defines the sizes and dimensions of the parts. This is not the case with chairs and tables. Imagination is also crucial in designing drawers, not to mention arranging them for both practicality and aesthetic appeal.
Harmony of Parts.—But one thing should be observed in the making of furniture, namely, harmony [Pg 42] between the parts. For instance, a table with thin legs and a thick top gives the appearance of a top-heavy structure; or the wrong use of two different styles is bad from an artistic standpoint; moreover, it is the height of refined education if, in the use of contrasting woods, they are properly blended to form a harmonious whole.
Parts in Harmony.—One important thing to keep in mind when making furniture is the harmony between the parts. For example, a table with skinny legs and a thick top looks top-heavy; using two different styles incorrectly isn't good from an artistic perspective; furthermore, it's a mark of refined taste if contrasting woods are well combined to create a cohesive design. [Pg 42]
Harmonizing Wood.—Imagine a chiffonier with the base of dark wood, like walnut, and the top of pine or maple, or a like light-colored wood. On the other hand, both walnut and maple, for instance, may be used in the same article, if they are interspersed throughout the entire article. The body may be made of dark wood and trimmed throughout with a light wood to produce a fine effect.
Harmonizing Wood.—Picture a drawer cabinet with a dark wooden base, like walnut, and a top made of pine or maple, or another similarly light-colored wood. Alternatively, both walnut and maple can be used in the same piece as long as they are mixed throughout the entire design. The main structure can be crafted from dark wood and highlighted with light wood accents to create an appealing look.
[Pg 43]
[Pg 43]
CHAPTER V
HOW WORK IS LAID OUT
Concrete Examples of Work.—A concrete example of doing any work is more valuable than an abstract statement. For this purpose I shall direct the building of a common table with a drawer in it and show how the work is done in detail.
Real Work Examples.—A specific example of doing any work is more useful than a general statement. For this purpose, I will guide you through building a simple table with a drawer and demonstrate how the work is done step by step.
For convenience let us adopt the Mission style, with a top 36" × 42" and the height 30". The legs should be 2" × 2" and the top 1", dressed. The material should be of hard wood with natural finish, or, what is better still, a soft wood, like birch, which may be stained a dark brown, as the Mission style is more effective in dark than in light woods.
For convenience, let's go with the Mission style, with a top measuring 36" × 42" and a height of 30". The legs should be 2" × 2" and the top 1", planed smooth. The material should be hardwood with a natural finish, or even better, softwood like birch, which can be stained dark brown, as the Mission style looks better in dark woods than in light ones.
Framework.—As we now know the sizes, the first thing is to build the framework. The legs should be dressed square and smoothed down with the fore plane to make them perfectly straight. Now, lay out two mortises at the upper end of each [Pg 44] leg. Follow the illustrations to see how this is done.
Framework.—Now that we know the sizes, the first step is to build the framework. The legs should be squared off and smoothed with the fore plane to ensure they are perfectly straight. Next, mark out two mortises at the top end of each leg. Refer to the illustrations to see how this is done. [Pg 44]
Laying Out the Legs.—Fig. 27 shows a leg with square cross marks (A) at each end. These marks indicate the finished length of the leg. You will also see crosses on two sides. These indicate what is called the "work sides." The work sides are selected because they are the finest surfaces on the leg.
Setting Up the Legs.—Fig. 27 shows a leg with square cross marks (A) at each end. These marks indicate the finished length of the leg. You will also see crosses on two sides. These indicate what are known as the "work sides." The work sides are chosen because they are the best surfaces on the leg.
The Length of the Mortises.—Then take a small try square (Fig. 28) and add two cross lines (B, C) on each of the inner surfaces, the second line (B) one-half inch from the finish line (A), and the other line (C) seven inches down from the line (A). The side facing boards, hereafter described, are seven inches wide.
The Length of the Mortises.—Next, grab a small try square (Fig. 28) and mark two cross lines (B, C) on each of the inner surfaces. The second line (B) should be half an inch from the finish line (A), and the other line (C) should be seven inches down from the line (A). The boards that will face each other, which will be described later, are seven inches wide.
When this has been done for all the legs, prepare your gage (Fig. 29) to make the mortise scribe, and, for convenience in illustrating, the leg [Pg 45] is reversed. If the facing boards are 1" thick, and the tenons are intended to be ½" thick, the first scribe line (E) should be ½" from the work side, because the shoulder on the facing board projects out ¼", and the outer surface of the facing board should not be flush with the outer surface of the leg. The second gage line (F) should be 1" from the work side.
When you've done this for all the legs, get your gage ready (Fig. 29) to mark the mortise scribe. For clarity in the illustration, the leg is shown upside down. If the facing boards are 1" thick, and the tenons are meant to be ½" thick, the first scribe line (E) should be ½" from the work side, because the shoulder on the facing board sticks out ¼", and the outer surface of the facing board should not be even with the outer surface of the leg. The second gage line (F) should be 1" from the work side.
The Mortises.—When the mortises have been made they will appear as shown in the enlarged cross section of the leg (Fig. 30), the total depth of each mortise being 1½". The depth of this mortise determines for us the length of the tenons on the facing boards.
The Mortises.—Once the mortises are created, they will look like what is shown in the enlarged cross section of the leg (Fig. 30), with each mortise having a total depth of 1½". This depth of the mortise determines the length of the tenons on the facing boards.
The Facing Boards.—These boards are each 1 inch thick and 7 inches wide. As the top of the table is 42 inches long, and we must provide an overhang, say of 2 inches, we will first take off 4 inches for the overhang and 4 inches for the [Pg 46] legs, so that the length of two of the facing boards, from shoulder to shoulder, must be 34 inches; and the other two facing boards 28 inches. Then, as we must add 1½ inches for each tenon, two of the boards will be 37 inches long and two of them 31 inches long.
The Facing Boards.—Each of these boards is 1 inch thick and 7 inches wide. The top of the table is 42 inches long, and we need to account for a 2-inch overhang. So, we subtract 4 inches for the overhang and 4 inches for the legs, which means the length of the two facing boards, from shoulder to shoulder, must be 34 inches; and the other two facing boards will be 28 inches. Then, since we need to add 1½ inches for each tenon, two of the boards will be 37 inches long and the other two will be 31 inches long.
The illustration (Fig. 31) shows a board marked with the cross lines (B) at each end for the end of the tenons, or the extreme ends of the boards.
The illustration (Fig. 31) shows a board marked with the cross lines (B) at each end for the ends of the tenons, or the farthest ends of the boards.
The Tenons.—Do not neglect first to select the work side and the working edge of the board. The outer surface and the upper edges are the sides to work from. The cheekpiece (A) of the gage must always rest against the working side.
The Tenons.—Make sure to first choose the work side and the working edge of the board. The outer surface and the upper edges are the sides you should work from. The cheekpiece (A) of the gauge must always sit against the working side.
[Pg 47] The cross marks (B, C) should be made with the point of a sharp knife, and before the small back saw is used on the cross-cuts the lines (B), which indicate the shoulders, should be scored with a sharp knife, as shown in Fig. 33. This furnishes a guide for the saw, and makes a neat finish for the shoulder.
[Pg 47] The cross marks (B, C) should be made with the tip of a sharp knife, and before using the small backsaw on the cross-cuts, the lines (B) that show the shoulders should be scored with a sharp knife, as shown in Fig. 33. This creates a guide for the saw and ensures a clean finish for the shoulder.
Tools Used.—The back saw is used for cutting the tenon, and the end of the board appears as [Pg 48] shown in the enlarged Fig. 34. Two things are now necessary to complete the tenons. On the upper or work edge of each board use the gage to mark off a half-inch slice, and then cut away the flat side of the tenon at the end, on its inner surface, so it will appear as shown in Fig. 35.
Tools Used.—The backsaw is used to cut the tenon, and the end of the board looks like [Pg 48] shown in the enlarged Fig. 34. Two things are needed to finish the tenons. On the top or working edge of each board, use the gauge to mark off a half-inch slice, and then cut away the flat side of the tenon at the end, on its inner surface, so it looks like what’s shown in Fig. 35.
Chamfered Tenons.—The object of these chamfered or beveled tenons is to permit the ends to approach each other closely within the mortise, as shown in the assembled parts (Fig. 36).
Beveled Tenons.—The purpose of these chamfered or beveled tenons is to allow the ends to get close to each other within the mortise, as illustrated in the assembled parts (Fig. 36).
The Frame Assembled.—The frame is now ready to assemble, but before doing so a drawer opening and supports should be made. The ends [Pg 49] of the supports may be mortised into the side pieces or secured by means of gains.
The frame is put together.—The frame is now ready to be assembled, but before you start, a drawer opening and supports should be created. The ends of the supports can either be mortised into the side pieces or secured using gains. [Pg 49]
Mortises and tenons are better.
Mortise and tenon joints are better.
The Drawer Supports.—Take one of the side-facing boards (Fig. 37) and cut a rectangular opening in it. This opening should be 4 inches wide and 18 inches long, so placed that there is 1 inch of stock at the upper margin and 2 inches of stock at the lower margin of the board. At each lower corner make a mortise (A), so that one side of the mortise is on a line with the margin of the opening, and so that it extends a half inch past the vertical margin of the opening.
The Drawer Brackets.—Take one of the side-facing boards (Fig. 37) and cut a rectangular opening in it. This opening should be 4 inches wide and 18 inches long, positioned so that there is 1 inch of material at the top and 2 inches of material at the bottom of the board. At each lower corner, create a mortise (A) so that one side of the mortise is in line with the edge of the opening and extends a half inch past the vertical edge of the opening.
You can easily cut a gain (B) in a strip, or, as in Fig. 38, you may use two strips, one (C) an inch wide and a half inch thick, and on this nail a strip (D) along one margin. This forms the guide and rest for the drawer.
You can easily cut a piece (B) in a strip, or, as shown in Fig. 38, you can use two strips, one (C) an inch wide and half an inch thick, and nail a strip (D) along one edge. This serves as the guide and support for the drawer.
At the upper margin of the opening is a rebate or gain (E) at each corner, extending down to the top line of the drawer opening, into which are fitted the ends of the upper cross guides.
At the top edge of the opening is a notch or recess (E) at each corner, reaching down to the top line of the drawer opening, where the ends of the upper cross guides are inserted.
[Pg 50] The Table Frame.—When the entire table frame is assembled it will have the appearance shown in Fig. 39, and it is now ready for the top.
[Pg 50] The Table Frame.—Once the whole table frame is put together, it will look like what’s shown in Fig. 39, and it's now ready for the top.
The Top.—The top should be made of three boards, either tongued and grooved, or doweled and glued together. In order to give a massive appearance, and also to prevent the end grain of the boards from being exposed, beveled strips may be used to encase the edges. These marginal cleats are ¾ inch thick and 2 inches wide, and joined by beveled ends at the corners, as shown in Fig. 40.
The Peak.—The top should consist of three boards, either tongue-and-groove or doweled and glued together. To create a sturdy look and to hide the end grain of the boards, beveled strips can be used to cover the edges. These edge pieces are ¾ inch thick and 2 inches wide, and they are connected at the corners with beveled ends, as shown in Fig. 40.
The Drawer.—The drawer (Fig. 41) shown in cross section, has its front (A) provided with an overlapping flange (B).
The Drawer.—The drawer (Fig. 41) shown in cross section has a front (A) with an overlapping flange (B).
[Pg 51] It is not our object in this chapter to show how each particular article is made, but simply to point out the underlying principles, and to illustrate how the fastening elements, the tenons and mortises, are formed, so that the boy will know the proper steps in their natural order.
[Pg 51] In this chapter, we’re not trying to explain how every single item is made, but rather to highlight the basic principles and show how the fastening components, like tenons and mortises, are created, so that the boy understands the right steps in their natural sequence.
How Any Structure Is Built Up.—It should be observed that each structure, however small, is usually built from the base up. Just the same as the more pretentious buildings are erected: First, the sill, then the floor supports, then the posts and top plates, with their connecting girders, and, finally, the roof.
How Any Structure Is Constructed.—It’s important to note that every structure, no matter how small, is typically built from the ground up. Just like the larger, more impressive buildings are constructed: First, the foundation, then the floor supports, followed by the posts and top plates, with their connecting beams, and finally, the roof.
The chapter on House Building will give more detailed illustrations of large structures, and how they are framed and braced. At this point we are more concerned in knowing how to proceed in order to lay out the simple structural details, and if one subject of this kind is fully mastered the complicated character of the article will not be difficult to master. [Pg 52]
The chapter on House Building will provide more detailed examples of large structures, including how they're framed and supported. Right now, we should focus on understanding how to outline the basic structural details, and once one topic of this kind is fully grasped, the more complex aspects won't be hard to understand. [Pg 52]
Observations About a Box.—As simple a little article as a box frequently becomes a burden to a beginner. Try it. Simply keep in mind one thing; each box has six sides. Now, suppose you want a box with six equal sides—that is, a cubical form—it is necessary to make only three pairs of sides; two for the ends, two for the sides and two for the top and bottom. Each set has dimensions different from the other sets. Both pieces of the set, representing the ends, are square; the side pieces are of the same width as the end pieces, and slightly longer; and the top and bottom are longer and wider than the end pieces.
Thoughts on a Box.—As simple as a box may seem, it often becomes a challenge for a beginner. Give it a try. Just remember one thing: each box has six sides. Now, if you want a box with six equal sides—that is, a cube—you only need to create three pairs of sides; two for the ends, two for the sides, and two for the top and bottom. Each set has dimensions that are different from the others. Both pieces of the set for the ends are square; the side pieces have the same width as the end pieces but are slightly longer; and the top and bottom pieces are longer and wider than the end pieces.
A box equal in all its dimensions may be made out of six boards, properly cut. Make an attempt in order to see if you can get the right dimensions.
A box with equal sides can be made from six boards that are cut correctly. Give it a try to see if you can get the right measurements.
Joints.—For joining together boards at right angles to each other, such as box corners, drawers and like articles, tenons and mortises should never be resorted to. In order to make fine work the joints should be made by means of dovetails, rabbets [Pg 53] or rebates, or by beveling or mitering the ends.
Joints.—To join boards at right angles to each other, like the corners of boxes, drawers, and similar items, you should never use tenons and mortises. For high-quality work, the joints should be done using dovetails, rabbets, [Pg 53] or rebates, or by beveling or mitering the ends.
Beveling and Mitering.—There is a difference in the terms "beveling" and "mitering," as used in the art. In Fig. 42 the joint A is beveled, and in Fig. 43 the joint B is mitered, the difference being that a bevel is applied to an angle joint like a box corner, while a miter has reference to a joint such as is illustrated in Fig. 43, such as the corner of a picture frame.
Beveling and mitering.—There’s a distinction between "beveling" and "mitering" in this context. In Fig. 42, the joint A is beveled, and in Fig. 43, the joint B is mitered. The difference is that a bevel is used for an angled joint, like a box corner, while a miter refers to a joint like the one shown in Fig. 43, such as the corner of a picture frame.
Proper Terms.—It is the application of the correct terms to things that lays the foundation for accurate thinking and proper expressions in describing work. A wise man once said that the basis of true science consists in correct definitions.
Correct Terms.—Using the right terms for things is what establishes the groundwork for clear thinking and effective communication about work. A wise person once stated that the foundation of real science lies in accurate definitions.
Picture Frames.—In picture frames the mitered corners may have a saw kerf (C) cut across the corners, as shown in Fig. 44, and a thin blade [Pg 54] of hard wood driven in, the whole being glued together.
Picture Frames.—In picture frames, the mitered corners might have a saw cut (C) across the corners, as shown in Fig. 44, and a thin piece of hardwood driven in, all glued together. [Pg 54]
Dovetail Joints.—It is in the laying out of the more complicated dovetail joints that the highest skill is required, because exactness is of more importance in this work than in any other article in joinery. In order to do this work accurately follow out the examples given, and you will soon be able to make a beautiful dovetail corner, and do it quickly.
Dovetail Joints.—When it comes to crafting the more complex dovetail joints, it takes the highest level of skill, as precision is more crucial in this task than in any other joinery work. To achieve this accurately, follow the provided examples, and you'll soon be able to create a beautiful dovetail corner quickly.
Preparing a Box Joint.—In order to match a box joint for the inner end of a table drawer, the first step is to select two work sides. One work side will be the edge of the board, and the other the side surface of the board, and on those surfaces we will put crosses, as heretofore suggested.
Making a Box Joint.—To create a box joint for the inner end of a table drawer, the first step is to choose two working sides. One working side will be the edge of the board, and the other will be the side surface of the board. We will mark crosses on those surfaces, as previously mentioned.
First Steps.—Now lap together the inner surfaces of these boards (Y, Z), so the ends are toward you, as shown in Fig. 45. Then, after measuring [Pg 55] the thickness of the boards to be joined (the thinnest, if they are of different thicknesses), set your compasses, or dividers, for ¼ inch, providing the boards are ½ inch thick, and, commencing at the work edge of the board, step off and point, as at A, the whole width of the board, and with a square make the two cross marks (B), using [Pg 56] the two first compass points (A), then skipping one, using the next two, and so on.
First Steps.—Now align the inner surfaces of these boards (Y, Z) so that the ends are facing you, as shown in Fig. 45. Then, after measuring the thickness of the boards to be joined (the thinner one, if they have different thicknesses), set your compass or dividers to ¼ inch, assuming the boards are ½ inch thick. Starting from the working edge of the board, mark points at intervals along the entire width of the board, as shown at A, and with a square make two cross marks (B) using the first two compass points (A), then skipping one, use the next two, and continue in this manner.
When this is done, turn up the board Z (Fig. 46), so that it is at right angles to the board Y, and so the outer surface of the board Z is flush with the end of the board X, and with a sharp knife point extend the lines B along with the grain of the wood on board Z,up to the cross mark C. This cross mark should have been previously made [Pg 57] and is located as far from the end of the board Z as the thickness of the board Y.
When this is done, rotate board Z (Fig. 46) so that it forms a right angle with board Y, making sure the outer edge of board Z is even with the end of board X. Using a sharp knife, extend the lines B along the grain of the wood on board Z up to the cross mark C. This cross mark should have been made earlier and is positioned as far from the end of board Z as the thickness of board Y. [Pg 57]
We now have the marks for the outer surface of the board Z, and the end marks of board Y. For the purpose of getting the angles of the end of the board Z and the outer side of board Y, a cross line (D, Fig. 47) is drawn across the board X near the end, this line being as far from the end as the thickness of the board Z, and a vertical line (E) is drawn midway between the two first cross marks (A).
We now have the markings for the outer surface of board Z and the end markings of board Y. To determine the angles at the end of board Z and the outer side of board Y, we draw a cross line (D, Fig. 47) on board X near the end. This line is positioned at a distance from the end equal to the thickness of board Z, and a vertical line (E) is drawn halfway between the two initial cross marks (A).
Now, with your compass, which, in the meantime, has not been changed, make a mark (F), and draw down the line (G), which will give you the working angle at which you may set the bevel gage. Then draw down an angle from each alternate cross line (A), and turn the bevel and draw down the lines (H). These lines should all be produced on the opposite side of the board, so as to assure accuracy, and to this end the edges of the board also should be scribed.
Now, take your compass, which hasn’t changed in the meantime, make a mark (F), and draw down the line (G), which will give you the working angle to set the bevel gauge. Then draw down an angle from each alternate cross line (A), turn the bevel, and draw down the lines (H). All these lines should be extended on the opposite side of the board to ensure accuracy, and for this purpose, the edges of the board should also be marked.
Cutting Out the Spaces.—In cutting out the intervening spaces, which should be done with a sharp chisel, care should be observed not to cut over the shoulder lines. To prevent mistakes you should put some distinctive mark on each part to be cut away. In this instance E, H show the parts [Pg 58] to be removed, and in Fig. 48 two of the cutaway portions are indicated.
Eliminating the Gaps.—When cutting out the spaces in between, which should be done with a sharp chisel, be careful not to cut over the shoulder lines. To avoid mistakes, you should place a distinctive mark on each part that needs to be removed. In this case, E and H indicate the parts to be cut away, and in Fig. 48, two of the cutaway portions are shown. [Pg 58]
When the end of the board Z is turned up (Fig. 49), it has merely the longitudinal parallel lines B. The bevel square may now be used in the same manner as on the side of the board Y, and the fitting angles will then be accurately true.
When the end of board Z is raised (Fig. 49), it only shows the long parallel lines B. You can now use the bevel square just like on the side of board Y, and the angles will fit perfectly.
This is shown in Fig. 50, in which, also, two of the cutaway parts are removed.
This is shown in Fig. 50, where two of the cutaway parts are also removed.
Tools Used in Laying Out Tenons and Mortises.—A sharp-pointed knife must always be used for making all marks. Never employ an awl for this work, as the fiber of the wood will be torn up by it. A small try square should always be used (not the large iron square), and this with a sharp-pointed compass and bevel square will enable you to turn out a satisfactory piece of work.
Tools Used for Creating Tenons and Mortises.—A sharp knife should always be used for making all marks. Never use an awl for this task, as it will tear the wood fibers. A small try square is essential (not the large iron square), and along with a sharp compass and bevel square, these tools will help you create a quality piece of work.
The foregoing examples, carefully studied, will enable you to gather the principles involved in laying off any work. If you can once make a presentable box joint, so that all the dovetails will accurately fit together, you will have accomplished one of the most difficult phases of the work, and it is an exercise which will amply repay you, because you will learn to appreciate what accuracy means.
The examples provided above, when studied closely, will help you understand the principles needed for completing any project. If you can create a well-made box joint, ensuring that all the dovetails fit together perfectly, you will have mastered one of the hardest aspects of the job, and it’s an exercise that will be well worth your effort, as you will come to understand the importance of accuracy.
[Pg 59]
[Pg 59]
CHAPTER VI
THE USES OF THE COMPASS AND THE SQUARE
The Square.—The square is, probably, the oldest of all tools, and that, together with the compass, or dividers, with which the square is always associated, has constituted the craftsman's emblem from the earliest historical times. So far as we now know, the plain flat form, which has at least one right angle and two or more straight edges, was the only form of square used by the workman. But modern uses, and the development of joinery and cabinet making, as well as the more advanced forms of machinery practice, necessitated new structural forms in the square, so that the bevel square, in which there is an adjustable blade set in a handle, was found necessary.
The Plaza.—The square is likely the oldest tool out there, and along with the compass or dividers, it's been a symbol of craftsmanship since ancient times. As far as we know, the basic flat shape, which has at least one right angle and two or more straight edges, was the only type of square used by workers. However, modern applications and the evolution of joinery and cabinet making, as well as more advanced machinery techniques, required new designs for squares, leading to the creation of the bevel square, which features an adjustable blade set in a handle.
The Try Square.—In the use of the ordinary large metal square it is necessary to lay the short limb of the square on the face of the work, and the long limb must, therefore, rest against the work side or edge of the timber, so that the scribing edge of the short limb does not rest flat against the work. As such a tool is defective in work requiring accuracy, it brought into existence [Pg 60] what is called the try square, which has a rectangular handle, usually of wood, into which is fitted at one end a metal blade, which is at right angles to the edge of the handle. The handle, therefore, always serves as a guide for the blade in scribing work, because it lies flat down on the work.
The Try Square.—When using a standard large metal square, you need to place the short arm of the square on the surface of the work, while the long arm should rest against the side or edge of the wood. This way, the marking edge of the short arm isn’t pressed flat against the work. Since this tool is not ideal for tasks needing precision, it led to the development of the try square, which features a rectangular handle, typically made of wood, with a metal blade fitted at one end that is positioned at a right angle to the edge of the handle. The handle thus always acts as a guide for the blade when marking, as it sits flat on the work. [Pg 60]
The T-Square is another modification of the try square, its principal use being for draughting purposes.
The T-Square is another version of the try square, primarily used for drafting.
The Compass.—The compass is one of the original carpenter's tools. The difference between compass and dividers is that compasses have adjustable pen or pencil points, whereas dividers are without adjustable points. Modern work has brought refinements in the character of the compass and dividers, so that we now have the bow-compass, which is, usually, a small tool, one leg of which carries a pen or pencil point, the two legs being secured together, usually, by a spring bow, or by a hinged joint with a spring attachment.
The Compass.—The compass is one of the original carpenter's tools. The difference between compass and dividers is that compasses have adjustable pen or pencil points, while dividers do not have adjustable points. Modern work has improved the design of the compass and dividers, so now we have the bow-compass, which is typically a small tool; one leg holds a pen or pencil point, and the two legs are usually connected by a spring bow or by a hinge with a spring attachment.
Proportional Dividers.—A useful tool is called the proportional dividers, the legs of which are hinged together intermediate the ends, so that the pivotal joint is adjustable. By means of this tool the scale of work may be changed, although its widest field of usefulness is work laid off on a [Pg 61] scale which you intend to reduce or enlarge proportionally.
Proportional Dividers.—A helpful tool known as proportional dividers has legs that are hinged together at a point between the ends, allowing for an adjustable pivot joint. With this tool, you can change the scale of your work, although its main benefit is for projects that you want to reduce or enlarge proportionally. [Pg 61]
Determining Angles.—Now, in order to lay out work the boy should know quickly and accurately how to determine various angles used or required in his work. The quickest way in which to learn this is to become familiar with the degree in its various relations.
Measuring Angles.—Now, to plan his work, the boy should quickly and accurately know how to find different angles that are used or needed in his tasks. The fastest way to learn this is to get familiar with the degree and its different relationships.
Definition of Degree.—A degree is not a measure, as we would designate a foot or a pound to determine distance or quantity. It is used to denote a division, space, interval or position. To illustrate, look at the circle, Fig. 51. The four cardinal points are formed by the cross lines (A, B), and in each one of the quadrants thus formed the circle is divided into 90 degrees. Look at the radial lines (C, D), and you will find that the distance between these lines is different along the [Pg 62] curved line (E) than along the curved line (F). The degree is, therefore, to indicate only the space, division or interval in the circle.
Definition of Degree.—A degree is not a measurement like a foot or a pound used to determine distance or weight. Instead, it indicates a division, space, interval, or position. To illustrate, look at the circle, Fig. 51. The four main points are formed by the cross lines (A, B), and in each of the quadrants created, the circle is divided into 90 degrees. Look at the radial lines (C, D), and you'll see that the distance between these lines varies along the curved line (E) compared to the curved line (F). Therefore, the degree is meant to denote only the space, division, or interval in the circle.
The Most Important Angle.—Most important for one to know at a glance is that of 45 degrees, because the one can the more readily calculate the other degrees, approximately, by having 45 degrees once fixed in the mind, and impressed on the visual image. With a square and a compass it is a comparatively easy matter accurately to step off 45 degrees, as it is the line C, midway between A and B, and the other degrees may be calculated from the line C and the cardinal lines A or B.
The Most Important Angle.—The most important angle to recognize quickly is 45 degrees, as it makes it easier to estimate other angles by having 45 degrees firmly fixed in your mind and visual memory. Using a square and a compass, it's relatively simple to measure out 45 degrees accurately, since it's the line C, which is right in the middle of A and B. You can then calculate the other angles based on line C and the main lines A or B.
Degrees Without a Compass.—But in the absence of a compass and when you do not wish to step off a circle, you will in such case lay down the square, and mark off at the outer margin of the limbs two equal dimensions. Suppose we take 2 inches on each limb of the square. The angle thus formed by the angle square blade is 45 degrees. To find 30 degrees allow the blade of the angle square to run from 2 inches on one limb to 3½ inches on the other limb, and it will be found that for 15 degrees the blade runs from 2 inches on one limb to 7½ inches on the other limb. It would be well to fix firmly these three points, at least, in your mind, as they will be of the utmost value to you. It is a comparatively easy matter now to [Pg 63] find 10 degrees or 25 degrees, or any intermediate line.
Degrees Without a Map.—However, without a compass and when you want to stay on a circle, you should lay down the square and mark two equal measurements at the outer edge of the sides. Let's take 2 inches on each side of the square. The angle made by the square's blade is 45 degrees. To find 30 degrees, let the square's blade extend from 2 inches on one side to 3½ inches on the other side, and you'll discover that for 15 degrees, the blade extends from 2 inches on one side to 7½ inches on the other. It's a good idea to firmly remember these three points, as they'll be extremely useful to you. It's relatively easy now to find 10 degrees or 25 degrees, or any midpoint. [Pg 63]
What Degrees Are Calculated From.—The question that now arises is what line one may use from which to calculate degrees, or at what point in the circle zero is placed. Degrees may be calculated either from the horizontal or from the vertical line. Examine Fig. 53. The working margin indicated by the cross mark is your base line, and in specifying an angle you calculate it from the work edge. Thus, the line A indicates an angle of 30 degrees. The dotted line is 45 degrees.
What Degrees Are Based On.—The question now is which line to use for calculating degrees, or where zero is positioned on the circle. Degrees can be calculated either from the horizontal line or from the vertical line. Take a look at Fig. 53. The working margin marked by the cross is your baseline, and when specifying an angle, you calculate it from the working edge. So, the line A indicates an angle of 30 degrees. The dotted line represents 45 degrees.
[Pg 64] The Dividers.—The dividers are used not only for scribing circles, but also for stepping and dividing spaces equally. There is a knack in the use of the dividers, where accuracy is wanted, and where the surface is of wood. Unless the utmost care is observed, the spaces will be unequal, for the reason that the point of the dividers will sink more deeply into the wood at some places than at others, due to the uneven texture of the wood grain. It will be better to make a line lengthwise, and a cross line (A) for starting (see Fig. 54). You may then insert one point of the dividers at the initial mark (B), and describe a small arc (C). Then move the dividers over to the intersection of the arc (C) on the line, and make the next mark, and so on.
[Pg 64] The Dividers.—Dividers are used not just for drawing circles, but also for measuring and dividing spaces evenly. There’s a technique to using dividers when precision is required, especially on wooden surfaces. If you’re not careful, the spaces will be uneven because the point of the dividers can sink deeper into the wood in some areas than in others due to the wood grain's uneven texture. It’s better to start by making a line along the length of the wood and a cross line (A) for reference (see Fig. 54). You can then place one point of the dividers at the starting mark (B) and draw a small arc (C). Next, move the dividers to the point where the arc (C) intersects the line, mark the point, and continue this process.
Some useful hints along this same line will be found under the chapter on Drawing, which should be carefully studied.
Some helpful tips on this topic can be found in the chapter on Drawing, which should be studied thoroughly.
[Pg 65]
[Pg 65]
CHAPTER VII
HOW THE DIFFERENT STRUCTURAL PARTS ARE DESIGNATED
The Right Name for Everything.—Always make it a point to apply the right term to each article or portion of a structure. Your explanation, to those who do know the proper technical terms, will render much easier a thorough understanding; and to those who do not know, your language will be in the nature of an education.
The Perfect Name for Everything.—Always make sure to use the correct term for each item or part of a structure. Your explanation will make it much easier for those who know the right technical terms to fully understand, and for those who don't, your language will serve as a form of education.
Proper Designations.—Every part in mechanism, every point, curve and angle has its peculiar designation. A knowledge of terms is an indication of thoroughness in education, and, as heretofore stated, becomes really the basis of art, as well as of the sciences. When you wish to impart information to another you must do it in terms understood by both.
Correct Titles.—Every component in a mechanism, every point, curve, and angle has its specific name. Knowing these terms shows a deep understanding of your education and, as mentioned before, is fundamentally important in both art and science. When you want to share information with someone else, you need to use language that both of you understand.
Furthermore, and for this very reason, you should study to find out how to explain or to define the terms. You may have a mental picture of the structure in your mind, but when asked to explain it you are lost.
Furthermore, and for this very reason, you should study to learn how to explain or define the terms. You might have a clear idea of the structure in your mind, but when asked to explain it, you find yourself confused.
Learning Mechanical Forms.—Suppose, for example, we take the words segment and sector. [Pg 66] Without a thorough understanding in your own mind you are likely to confuse these terms by taking one for the other. But let us assume you are to be called upon to explain a sector to some one who has no idea of terms and their definitions. How would you describe it? While it is true it is wedge-shaped, you will see by examining the drawing that it is not like a wedge. The sector has two sides running from a point like a wedge, but the large end of the sector is curved.
Learning Mechanical Designs.—Let’s take the words segment and sector as an example. [Pg 66] If you don’t fully understand these terms in your own mind, you might mix them up. But let’s say you need to explain what a sector is to someone who has no knowledge of these words and their meanings. How would you explain it? While it is true that a sector has a wedge shape, looking at the drawing, you can see it isn’t exactly like a wedge. The sector has two sides that extend from a point like a wedge, but the wider end of the sector is curved.
If you were called upon to define a segment you might say it had one straight line and one curve, but this would not define it very lucidly. Therefore, in going over the designations given, not only fix in your mind the particular form, but try to remember some particular manner in which you can clearly express the form, the shape or the relation of the parts.
If you were asked to define a segment, you might say it has one straight line and one curve, but that wouldn’t explain it very clearly. So, as you review the terms used, not only focus on the specific shape, but also try to think of a clear way to describe the form, the shape, or the relationship of the parts.
For your guidance, therefore, I have given, as far as possible, simple figures to aid you in becoming acquainted with structures and their designations, without repeating the more simple forms which I have used in the preceding chapters.
For your reference, I have provided, as much as I can, straightforward illustrations to help you familiarize yourself with structures and their names, without reiterating the simpler forms I used in the earlier chapters.
55. Arcade.—A series of arches with the columns or piers which support them, the spandrels above, and other parts.
55. Arcade.—A row of arches supported by columns or piers, with the areas above them and other elements.
[Pg 67] 56. Arch.—A curved member made up, usually, of separate wedge-shaped solids, A. K, Keystone; S, Springers; C, Chord, or span.
[Pg 67] 56. Arch.—A curved structure typically made up of individual wedge-shaped pieces, A. K, Keystone; S, Springers; C, Chord, or span.
57. Buttress.—A projecting mass of masonry. A, used for resisting the thrust of an arch, or for ornamentation; B, a flying buttress.
57. Buttress.—A protruding structure made of masonry. A, used to counteract the force of an arch, or for decoration; B, a flying buttress.
58. Chamfer.—The surface A formed by cutting away the arris or angle formed by two faces, B, C, of material.
58. Chamfer.—Surface A created by cutting away the edge or angle formed by two sides, B and C, of a material.
59. Cotter or Cotter Pin.—A pin, A, either flat, square or round, driven through a projecting tongue to hold it in position.
59. Cotter or Cotter Pin.—A pin, A, that can be flat, square, or round, is inserted through a sticking-out piece to secure it in place.
60. Crenelated.—A form of molding indented or notched, either regularly or irregularly.
60. Crenelated.—A type of molding that has indents or notches, either in a regular or irregular pattern.
61. Crosses.—1. Latin cross, in the Church of Rome carried before Bishops. 2. Double cross, carried before Cardinals and Bishops. 3. Triple or Papal cross. 4. St. Andrew's and St. Peter's cross. 5. Maltese cross. 6. St. Anthony or Egyptian cross. 7. Cross of Jerusalem. 8. A cross patté or fermé (head or first). 9. A cross patonce (that is, growing larger at the ends). 10. Greek cross.
61. Crosses.—1. Latin cross, which is carried before Bishops in the Roman Church. 2. Double cross, carried before Cardinals and Bishops. 3. Triple or Papal cross. 4. St. Andrew's and St. Peter's cross. 5. Maltese cross. 6. St. Anthony or Egyptian cross. 7. Cross of Jerusalem. 8. A cross patté or fermé (the head or first). 9. A cross patonce (which gets wider at the ends). 10. Greek cross.
62. Curb Roof.—A roof having a double slope, or composed on each side of two parts which have unequal inclinations; a gambrel roof.
62. Curb Roof.—A roof with a double slope, or made up on each side of two sections that have different angles; a gambrel roof.
63. Cupola.—So called on account of its resemblance to a cup. A roof having a rounded form. When on a large scale it is called a dome.
63. Cupola.—Named for its similarity to a cup. A roof that has a rounded shape. When it's large, it's referred to as a dome.
Crown Post.—See King Post.
Crown Post.—See King Post.
64. Console.—A bracket with a projection not more than half its height.
64. Console.—A support with a projection that is no more than half its height.
65. Corbels.—A mass of brackets to support a shelf or structure. Largely employed in Gothic architecture.
65. Corbels.—A group of brackets used to support a shelf or structure. They are mostly found in Gothic architecture.
66. Dormer.—A window pierced in a roof and so set as to be vertical, while the roof slopes away from it. Also called a Gablet.
66. Dormer.—A window built into a roof that is positioned vertically, with the roof sloping away from it. It’s also known as a Gablet.
67. Dowel.—A pin or stud in one block, or body, designed to engage with holes in another body to hold them together in alignment.
67. Dowel.—A pin or rod in one piece that is meant to fit into holes in another piece to keep them aligned and attached.
68. Drip.—That part of a cornice or sill course A, or other horizontal member which projects beyond the rest, so as to divert water.
68. Drip.—That part of a cornice or sill course A, or other horizontal element that sticks out further than the rest to redirect water.
[Pg 68] 69. Detents.—Recesses to lock or to serve as a stop or holding place.
[Pg 68] 69. Detents.—Notches used to lock something in place or to act as a stop or holding spot.
70. Extrados.—The exterior curve of an arch, especially the upper curved face A. B is the Intrados or Soffit.
70. Extrados.—The outside curve of an arch, especially the upper curved surface. A. B is the Intrados or Soffit.
71. Engrailed.—Indented with small concave curves, as the edge of a bordure, bend, or the like.
71. Engrailed.—Notched with small curved indents, like the edge of a border, bend, or similar design.
72. Facet.—The narrow plain surface, as A, between the fluting of a column.
72. Facet.—The thin flat surface, like A, between the grooves of a column.
73. Fret, Fretwork.—Ornamental work consisting of small fillets, or slats, intersecting each other or bent at right angles. Openwork in relief, when elaborated and minute in all its parts. Hence any minute play of light and shade. A, Japanese fretwork. B, Green fret.
73. Fret, Fretwork.—Decorative work made up of small strips or slats that cross each other or form right angles. It's openwork in relief, detailed and intricate in all its elements. Therefore, it creates any subtle play of light and shadow. A, Japanese fretwork. B, Green fret.
74. Frontal, also called Pediment.—The triangular space, A, above a door or window.
74. Frontal, also known as Pediment.—The triangular space, A, above a door or window.
75. Frustums.—That part of a solid next the base, formed by cutting off the top; or the part of any solid, as of a cone, pyramid, etc., between two planes, which may either be parallel or inclined to each other.
75. Frustums.—The portion of a solid that is next to the base, created by slicing off the top; or the section of any solid, like a cone or pyramid, that lies between two planes, which can be either parallel or slanted to one another.
76. Fylfat.—A rebated cross used as a secret emblem and worn as an ornament. It is also called Gammadium, and more commonly known as Swastika.
76. Fylfat.—A notched cross used as a secret symbol and worn as decoration. It is also called Gammadium, and more commonly known as the Swastika.
77. Gambrel Roof.—A curb roof having the same section in all its parts, with a lower, steeper and longer part. See Curb Roof and distinguish difference.
77. Gambrel Roof.—A curb roof that has the same shape throughout, featuring a lower, steeper, and longer section. See Curb Roof and note the differences.
78. Gargoyle.—A spout projecting from the roof gutter of a building, often carved grotesquely.
78. Gargoyle.—A spout that sticks out from the roof gutter of a building, usually carved in an exaggerated or bizarre style.
79. Gudgeon.—A wooden shaft, A, with a socket, B, into which is fitted a casting, C. The casting has a gudgeon, D.
79. Gudgeon.—A wooden shaft, A, with a socket, B, where a casting, C, is inserted. The casting has a gudgeon, D.
80. Guilloche.—An ornament in the form of two or more bands or strings twisted together or over or through each other.
80. Guilloche.—An ornament made up of two or more bands or strings intertwined or twisted together or through one another.
81. Half Timbered.—Constructed of a timber frame, having the spaces filled in with masonry.
81. Half Timbered.—Built with a timber frame, where the gaps are filled with masonry.
82. Hammer Beam.—A member of one description of roof truss, called hammer-beam truss, which is so framed as not to have a tie beam [Pg 69] at the top of the wall. A is the hammer beam, and C the pendant post.
82. Hammer Beam.—A part of a type of roof truss known as a hammer-beam truss, which is designed without a tie beam at the top of the wall. A is the hammer beam, and C is the pendant post. [Pg 69]
83. Haunches.—The parts A, A, on each side of the crown of an arch. Each haunch is from one-half to two-thirds of the half arch.
83. Haunches.—The sections A, A, on either side of the top of an arch. Each haunch makes up about one-half to two-thirds of the half arch.
84. Header.—A piece of timber, A, fitted between two trimmers, B, B, to hold the ends of the tail beams, C, C.
84. Header.—A piece of wood, A, placed between two trimmers, B, B, to support the ends of the tail beams, C, C.
85. Hip Roof.—The external angle formed by the meeting of two sloping sides or skirts of a roof which have their wall plates running in different directions.
85. Hip Roof.—The external angle created where two sloping sides or edges of a roof come together, with their wall plates extending in different directions.
86. Hood Molding.—A projecting molding over the head of an arch, as at A, forming the outer-most member of the archivolt.
86. Hood Molding.—A projecting molding over the top of an arch, like at A, that forms the outermost part of the archivolt.
87. Inclave.—The border, or borders, having a series of dovetails. One variation of molding or ornamentation.
87. Inclave.—The edge, or edges, featuring a pattern of dovetails. This is one type of molding or decoration.
88. Interlacing Arch.—Arches, usually circular, so constructed that their archivolts, A, intersect and seem to be interlaced.
88. Interlacing Arch.—Arches, typically circular, are designed in such a way that their archivolts, A, cross each other and appear to be woven together.
89. Invected.—Having a border or outline composed of semicircles or arches, with the convexity outward. The opposite of engrailed.
89. Invected.—Having a border or outline made up of semicircles or arches, with the outward curve facing outwards. The opposite of engrailed.
90. Inverted Arch.—An arch placed with the crown downward; used in foundation work.
90. Inverted Arch.—An arch set with the top facing down; used in foundation work.
91. Keystone.—The central or topmost stone, A, of an arch, sometimes decorated with a carving.
91. Keystone.—The central or top stone, A, of an arch, sometimes decorated with a carving.
92. King Post.—A member, A, of a common form of truss for roofs. It is strictly a tie intended to prevent the sagging of the tie beam, B, in the middle. If there are struts, C, supporting the rafters, D, they extend down to the foot of the King Post.
92. King Post.—A component, A, of a typical roof truss. It is essentially a tie meant to stop the tie beam, B, from sagging in the center. If there are struts, C, supporting the rafters, D, they reach down to the base of the King Post.
93. Label.—The name given to the projecting molding, A, around the top of the door opening. A form of mediæval architecture.
93. Label.—The term used for the projecting molding, A, around the top of the door opening. A style of medieval architecture.
94. Louver.—The sloping boards, A, set to shed rain water outward in an opening of a frame, as in belfry windows.
94. Louver.—The angled boards, A, designed to direct rainwater outward through an opening in a frame, like in bell tower windows.
[Pg 70] 95. Lintel.—A horizontal member. A spanning or opening of a frame, and designed to carry the wall above it.
[Pg 70] 95. Lintel.—A horizontal component. It spans an opening in a frame and is intended to support the wall above it.
96. Lug.—A. projecting piece, as A, to which anything is attached, or against which another part, like B, is held.
96. Lug.—A. a piece that sticks out, like A, to which something is attached, or against which another part, like B, is pressed.
97. M-Roof.—A kind of roof formed by the junction of two common roofs with a valley between them, so the section resembles the letter M.
97. M-Roof.—A type of roof created by the meeting of two standard roofs with a valley in between, making the shape look like the letter M.
98. Mansard Roof.—A hipped curb roof, that is, a roof having on all sides two slopes, the lower one, A, being steeper than the upper portion or deck.
98. Mansard Roof.—A hipped curb roof, which is a roof that has two slopes on all sides, with the lower slope, A, being steeper than the upper part or deck.
99. Newel Post.—The upright post at the foot of a stairway, to which the railing is attached.
99. Newel Post.—The vertical post at the bottom of a staircase, to which the railing is connected.
100. Parquetry.—A species of joinery or cabinet work, consisting of an inlay of geometric or other patterns, generally of different colored woods, used particularly for floors.
100. Parquetry.—A type of joinery or cabinetry that involves inlaying geometric or other patterns, typically made of different colored woods, mainly used for flooring.
101. Peen. also Pein.—The round, round-edged or hemispherical end, as at A, of a hammer.
101. Peen. also Pein.—The rounded or half-spherical end, like at A, of a hammer.
102. Pendant.—A hanging ornament on roofs, ceilings, etc., and much used in the later styles of Gothic architecture where it is of stone. Imitated largely in wood and plaster work.
102. Pendant.—A hanging ornament on roofs, ceilings, etc., commonly used in the later styles of Gothic architecture where it's made of stone. It is often mimicked in wood and plaster work.
103. Pentastyle.—A pillar. A portico having five pillars, A, is called the Pentastyle in temples of classical construction.
103. Pentastyle.—A pillar. A portico with five pillars, A, is referred to as the Pentastyle in classical architecture.
104. Pedestal.—An upright architectural member, A, right-angled in plan, constructionally a pier, but resembling a column, having a capital, shaft and base to agree with the columns in the structure.
104. Pedestal.—An upright architectural element, A, with a right angle in its plan, functionally similar to a pier but looking like a column, featuring a capital, shaft, and base that match the columns in the building.
105. Pintle.—An upright pivot pin, or the pin of a hinge; A represents the pintle of a rudder.
105. Pintle.—An upright pivot pin, or the pin of a hinge; A represents the pintle of a rudder.
106. Portico.—A colonnade or covered structure, especially in classical style, of architecture, and usually at the entrance of a building.
106. Portico.—A covered structure or row of columns, especially in classical architectural style, typically found at the entrance of a building.
107. Plate.—A horizontal timber, A, used as a top or header for supporting timbers, roofs and the like.
107. Plate.—A horizontal beam, A, used as a top or header to support other beams, roofs, and similar structures.
[Pg 71] 108. Queen Post.—One of two suspending posts in a roof truss, or other framed truss of simple form. Compare with King Post. A, B, tie beam; C, C, queen posts; D, straining piece; E, principal rafter; F, rafter.
[Pg 71] 108. Queen Post.—One of two vertical posts that support a roof truss or another type of basic framed truss. See King Post for comparison. A, B, tie beam; C, C, queen posts; D, straining piece; E, principal rafter; F, rafter.
109. Quirk Molding.—A small channel, deeply recessed, in proportion to its width, used to insulate and give relief to a convex rounded molding. An excellent corner post for furniture.
109. Quirk Molding.—A small, deeply recessed channel relative to its width, used to insulate and provide relief to a convex, rounded molding. It makes an excellent corner post for furniture.
110. Re-entering.—The figure shows an irregular polygon (that is, many-sided figure) and is a re-entering polygon. The recess A is a re-entering angle.
110. Re-entering.—The figure shows an irregular polygon (which is a many-sided shape) and is a re-entering polygon. The recess A is a re-entering angle.
111. Rafter.—Originally any rough and heavy piece of timber, but in modern carpentry used to designate the main roof support, as at A. See Queen Post.
111. Rafter.—Originally any rough and heavy piece of timber, but in modern carpentry used to refer to the main roof support, like at A. See Queen Post.
112. Scarfing.—Cutting timber at an angle along its length, as the line A. Scarfing joints are variously made. The overlapping joints may be straight or recessed and provided with a key block B. When fitted together they are securely held by plates and bolts.
112. Scarfing.—Cutting wood at an angle along its length, like the line A. Scarfing joints can be made in different ways. The overlapping joints can be straight or recessed and have a key block B. When put together, they are firmly secured with plates and bolts.
113. Scotia Molding.—A sunken molding in the base of a pillar, so called from the dark shadow which it casts.
113. Scotia Molding.—A recessed molding at the base of a pillar, named for the dark shadow it creates.
114. Sill.—In carpentry the base piece, or pieces, A, on which the posts of a structure are set.
114. Sill.—In carpentry, the base piece or pieces, A, where the posts of a structure are placed.
115. Skew-Back.—The course of masonry, such as a stone, A, with an inclined face, which forms the abutment for the voussoirs, B, or wedge-shaped stones comprising the arch.
115. Skew-Back.—The layout of masonry, like a stone, A, with a sloped face, serves as the support for the wedge-shaped stones, B, that make up the arch.
116. Spandrel.—The irregular, triangular space, A, between the curve of an arch and the enclosing right angle.
116. Spandrel.—The uneven, triangular space, A, between the curve of an arch and the surrounding right angle.
117. Strut.—In general, any piece of a frame, such as a timber A, or a brace B, which resists pressure or thrust in the direction of its length.
117. Strut.—Generally, any part of a frame, like a timber A or a brace B, that resists pressure or force along its length.
118. Stud, Studding.—The vertical timber or scantling, A, which is one of the small uprights of a building to which the boarding or plastering lath are nailed.
118. Stud, Studding.—The vertical piece of wood or timber, A, which is one of the small upright supports in a building to which the boards or plaster lath are attached.
[Pg 72] 119. Stile.—The main uprights of a door, as A, A; B, B, B, rails; C, C, mullions; D, D, panels.
[Pg 72] 119. Stile.—The main vertical pieces of a door, labeled A, A; B, B, B are the horizontal rails; C, C are the vertical mullions; D, D are the panels.
Tie Beam.—See Queen Post.
Tie Beam.—See Queen Post.
120. Trammel.—A very useful tool for drawing ellipses. It comprises a cross, A, with grooves and a bar, B, with pins, C, attached to sliding blocks in the grooves, and a pen or stylus, D, at the projecting end of the bar to scribe the ellipse.
120. Trammel.—A very useful tool for drawing ellipses. It consists of a cross, A, with grooves and a bar, B, with pins, C, attached to sliding blocks in the grooves, and a pen or stylus, D, at the extended end of the bar to draw the ellipse.
121. Turret.—A little tower, frequently only an ornamental structure at one of the angles of a larger structure.
121. Turret.—A small tower, often just a decorative feature at one of the corners of a larger building.
122. Transom.—A horizontal cross-bar, A, above a door or window or between a door and a window above it. Transom is the horizontal member, and if there is a vertical, like the dotted line B, it is called a Mullion. See Stile.
122. Transom.—A horizontal cross-bar, A, above a door or window or between a door and a window above it. The transom is the horizontal piece, and if there is a vertical piece, like the dotted line B, it is called a mullion. See Stile.
123. Valley Roof.—A place of meeting of two slopes of a roof which have their sides running in different directions and formed on the plan of a re-entrant angle.
123. Valley Roof.—A spot where two slopes of a roof meet, with their sides angled in different directions, creating a re-entrant angle in the layout.
[Pg 73]
[Pg 73]
CHAPTER VIII
DRAWING AND ITS UTILITY
A knowledge of drawing, at least so far as the fundamentals are concerned, is of great service to the beginner. All work, after being conceived in the brain, should be transferred to paper. A habit of this kind becomes a pleasure, and, if carried out persistently, will prove a source of profit. The boy with a bow pen can easily draw circles, and with a drawing or ruling pen he can make straight lines.
Knowing the basics of drawing is really helpful for beginners. Once an idea is formed in your mind, it should be put down on paper. Developing this habit can be enjoyable, and if done consistently, it can be very rewarding. A boy with a bow pen can easily draw circles, and with a drawing or ruling pen, he can create straight lines.
Representing Objects.—But let him try to represent some object, and the pens become useless. There is a vast difference in the use of drawing tools and free-hand drawing. While the boy who is able to execute free-hand sketches may become the better artist, still that art would not be of much service to him as a carpenter. First, because the use of tools gives precision, and this is necessary to the builder; and, second, because the artist deals wholly with perspectives, whereas the builder must execute from plane surfaces or elevations.
Representing Objects.—But let him try to depict some object, and the pens lose their effectiveness. There's a big difference between using drawing tools and freehand drawing. While a boy who can create freehand sketches might become the better artist, that skill wouldn't help him much as a carpenter. First, because using tools provides precision, which is essential for a builder; and second, because artists focus entirely on perspectives, while builders need to work from flat surfaces or elevations.
Forming Lines and Shadows.—It is not my intention to furnish a complete treatise on this subject, [Pg 74] but to do two things, one of which will be to show, among other features, how simple lines form objects; how shading becomes an effective aid; how proportions are formed; and, second, how to make irregular forms, and how they may readily be executed so that the boy may be able to grasp the ideas for all shapes and structural devices.
Forming Lines and Shadows.—I don't intend to provide a comprehensive guide on this topic, [Pg 74] but rather to achieve two goals. First, I want to demonstrate, among other things, how simple lines create objects, how shading can be a powerful tool, and how proportions are established. Second, I'll show how to create irregular shapes and how to execute them easily, so that the student can understand the concepts behind all forms and structural designs.
Analysis of Line Shading.—In the demonstration of this work I shall give an analysis of the simple lines formed, showing the terms used to designate the lines, curves, and formations, so that when any work is laid out the beginner will be able, with this glossary before him, to describe architecturally, as well as mathematically, the angles and curves with which he is working.
Analysis of Line Shading.—In this demonstration, I will provide an analysis of the basic lines created, explaining the terms used to identify the lines, curves, and shapes. This way, when any project is set up, beginners will be able to use this glossary to describe the angles and curves they are working with, both architecturally and mathematically.
How to Characterize Surface.—Suppose we commence simply with straight lines. How shall [Pg 75] we determine the character of the surface of the material between the two straight lines shown in Fig. 125? Is it flat, rounded, or concaved? Let us see how we may treat the surface by simple lines so as to indicate the configuration.
How to Characterize Surface.—Let’s start with straight lines. How do we figure out the nature of the surface of the material between the two straight lines shown in Fig. 125? Is it flat, rounded, or concave? Let’s explore how we can analyze the surface with simple lines to show its shape.
Concave Surfaces.—In Fig. 126 the shading lines commence at the upper margin, and are heaviest there, the lines gradually growing thinner and farther apart.
Concave Surfaces.—In Fig. 126, the shading lines start at the top edge and are the thickest there, with the lines gradually getting thinner and more spaced out.
Convex Surfaces.—In Fig. 127 the shading is very light along the upper margin, and heavy at the lower margin. The first shaded figure, therefore, represents a concaved surface, and the second [Pg 76] figure a convex surface. But why? Simply for the reason that in drawings, as well as in nature, light is projected downwardly, hence when a beam of light moves past the margin of an object, the contrast at the upper part, where the light is most intense, is strongest.
Convex Surfaces.—In Fig. 127, the shading is very light along the top edge and heavier at the bottom edge. The first shaded shape, therefore, represents a concave surface, while the second figure depicts a convex surface. But why? Simply because, in drawings as well as in nature, light shines downward, so when a beam of light moves past the edge of an object, the contrast at the top, where the light is most intense, is strongest. [Pg 76]
The shading of the S-shaped surface (Fig. 128) is a compound of Figs. 126 and 127.
The shading of the S-shaped surface (Fig. 128) is made up of Figs. 126 and 127.
Shadows From a Solid Body.—We can understand this better by examining Fig. 129, which shows a vertical board, and a beam of light (A) passing downwardly beyond the upper margin of the board. Under these conditions the upper margin of the board appears darker to the vision, by contrast, than the lower part. It should also be understood that, in general, the nearer the object the lighter it is, so that as the upper edge of the board is farthest from the eye the heavy shading there will at least give the appearance of distance to that edge.
Shadows From a Solid Object.—We can understand this better by looking at Fig. 129, which shows a vertical board and a beam of light (A) shining down past the top edge of the board. In this situation, the top edge of the board looks darker compared to the lower part because of the contrast. It's also important to note that, generally, the closer an object is, the lighter it appears. Therefore, since the upper edge of the board is farther from the eye, the heavy shading there will create an impression of distance for that edge.
[Pg 77] But suppose that instead of having the surface of the board flat, it should be concaved, as in Fig. 130, it is obvious that the hollow, or the concaved, portion of the board must intensify the shadows or the darkness at the upper edge. This explains why the heavy shading in Fig. 126 is at that upper margin.
[Pg 77] But suppose that instead of the board's surface being flat, it is shaped like a bowl, as shown in Fig. 130. It's clear that the hollow or concave part of the board will make the shadows or darkness at the top edge more intense. This is why the strong shading in Fig. 126 is along that upper margin.
Flat Effects.—If the board is flat it may be shaded, as shown in Fig. 131, in which the lines are all of the same thickness, and are spaced farther and farther apart at regularly increasing intervals.
Flat Effects.—If the board is flat, it can be shaded, as illustrated in Fig. 131, where all the lines are the same thickness and are spaced increasingly farther apart at regular intervals.
The Direction of Light.—Now, in drawing, we must observe another thing. Not only does the light always come from above, but it comes also from the left side. I show in Fig. 132 two squares, one within the other. All the lines are of the same thickness. Can you determine by means of such a drawing what the inner square represents? Is it a block, or raised surface, or is it a depression?
The Path of Light.—Now, when we draw, we need to notice something else. The light not only comes from above, but also from the left side. In Fig. 132, I show two squares, one inside the other. All the lines are the same thickness. Can you tell from this drawing whether the inner square represents a block, a raised surface, or a depression?
[Pg 78] Raised Surfaces.—Fig. 133 shows it in the form of a block, simply by thickening the lower and the right-hand lines.
[Pg 78] Elevated Surfaces.—Fig. 133 displays it as a block, achieved by making the lower and right lines thicker.
Depressed Surfaces.—If, by chance, you should make the upper and the left-hand lines heavy, as in Fig. 134, it would, undoubtedly, appear depressed, and would need no further explanation.
Depressed Surfaces.—If you happen to make the top and left lines bold, like in Fig. 134, it would definitely look sunken and wouldn't need any extra explanation.
Full Shading,—But, in order to furnish an additional example of the effect of shading, suppose we shade the surface of the large square, as shown in Fig. 135, and you will at once see that not only is the effect emphasized, but it all the more clearly expresses what you want to show. In like manner, in Fig. 136, we shade only the space within the inner square, and it is only too obvious how shadows give us surface conformation.
Total Shade—To provide another example of the impact of shading, let's say we shade the surface of the large square, as illustrated in Fig. 135. You will immediately notice that not only is the effect highlighted, but it also more clearly conveys what you want to demonstrate. Similarly, in Fig. 136, we shade only the area inside the inner square, and it's clear how shadows reveal the shape of the surface.
Illustrating Cube Shading.—In Fig. 137 I show merely nine lines joined together, all lines being of equal thickness.
Cube Shading Illustration.—In Fig. 137, I display just nine lines connected together, with all the lines having the same thickness.
As thus drawn it may represent, for instance, [Pg 79] a cube, or it may show simply a square base (A) with two sides (B, B) of equal dimensions.
As it's illustrated, it can represent, for example, [Pg 79] a cube, or it might just display a square base (A) with two sides (B, B) of equal size.
Shading Effects.—Now, to examine it properly so as to observe what the draughtsman wishes to express, look at Fig. 138, in which the three diverging lines (A, B, C) are increased in thickness, and the cube appears plainly. On the other hand, in Fig. 139, the thickening of the lines (D, E, F) shows an entirely different structure.
Shadow Effects.—Now, to take a closer look at what the artist wants to convey, check out Fig. 138, where the three diverging lines (A, B, C) are thicker, making the cube clearly visible. In contrast, Fig. 139 demonstrates that the thickening of the lines (D, E, F) reveals a completely different structure.
It must be remembered, therefore, that to show raised surfaces the general direction is to shade heavily the lower horizontal and the right vertical lines. (See Fig. 133.)
It should be noted that to display raised surfaces, the general approach is to heavily shade the lower horizontal and the right vertical lines. (See Fig. 133.)
Heavy Lines.—But there is an exception to this rule. See two examples (Fig. 140). Here two parallel [Pg 80] lines appear close together to form the edge nearest the eye. In such cases the second, or upper, line is heaviest. On vertical lines, as in Fig. 141, the second line from the right is heaviest. These examples show plain geometrical lines, and those from Figs. 138 to 141, inclusive, are in perspective.
Bold Lines.—However, there is an exception to this rule. Look at two examples (Fig. 140). Here, two parallel [Pg 80] lines are positioned closely together to form the edge closest to the eye. In these cases, the upper line is the thickest. For vertical lines, as shown in Fig. 141, the second line from the right is the thickest. These examples illustrate simple geometric lines, and those from Figs. 138 to 141, inclusive, are in perspective.
Perspective.—A perspective is a most deceptive figure, and a cube, for instance, may be drawn so that the various lines will differ in length, and also be equidistant from each other. Or all the lines may be of the same length and have the distances between them vary. Supposing we have two cubes, one located above the other, separated, say, two feet or more from each other. It is obvious that the lines of the two cubes will not be the same to a camera, because, if they were photographed, they would appear exactly as they are, so far as their positions are concerned, and not as they appear. But the cubes do appear to the eye [Pg 81] as having six equal sides. The camera shows that they do not have six equal sides so far as measurement is concerned. You will see, therefore, that the position of the eye, relative to the cube, is what determines the angle, or the relative angles of all the lines.
Point of view.—Perspective can be quite misleading. Take a cube, for example; it can be drawn in a way that makes the lines look different in length while still being equidistant from each other. Or all the lines might be the same length, but the distances between them can vary. Imagine we have two cubes, one stacked on top of the other, separated by, say, two feet or more. It's clear that the lines of the two cubes will look different to a camera. If they were photographed, they would show exactly as they are in terms of position, not how they appear. However, to the naked eye, the cubes seem to have six equal sides. The camera reveals that they do not have six equal sides when it comes to actual measurements. So, you'll see that the position of your eye relative to the cube determines the angle, or the relative angles of all the lines.
A True Perspective of a Cube.—Fig. 142 shows a true perspective—that is, it is true from the measurement standpoint. It is what is called an isometrical view, or a figure in which all the lines not only are of equal length, but the parallel lines are [Pg 82] all spaced apart the same distances from each other.
A Real Perspective of a Cube.—Fig. 142 shows a true perspective—that is, it is accurate from a measurement standpoint. It’s known as an isometric view, or a figure where all the lines are not only equal in length, but the parallel lines are [Pg 82] all spaced apart the same distance from each other.
Isometric Cube.—I enclose this cube within a circle, as in Fig. 143. To form this cube the circle (A) is drawn and bisected with a vertical line (B). This forms the starting point for stepping off the six points (C) in the circle, using the dividers without resetting, after you have made the circle. Then connect each of the points (C) by straight lines (D). These lines are called chords. From the center draw two lines (E) at an angle and one line (F) vertically. These are the radial lines. You will see from the foregoing that the chords (D) form the outline of the cube—or the lines farthest from the eye, and the radial lines (E, F) are the nearest to the eye. In this position we are looking at the block at a true diagonal—that is, from a corner at one side to the extreme corner on the opposite side.
Isometric Cube.—I’ll draw this cube inside a circle, as shown in Fig. 143. To create this cube, first, draw the circle (A) and bisect it with a vertical line (B). This creates the starting point for marking the six points (C) on the circle, using dividers without adjusting them after drawing the circle. Then, connect each of the points (C) with straight lines (D). These lines are called chords. From the center, draw two lines (E) at an angle and one line (F) straight up. These are the radial lines. You can see that the chords (D) outline the cube—or the lines that are farthest from your view, while the radial lines (E, F) are the closest. In this position, we are viewing the block from a true diagonal angle—looking from one corner to the opposite corner.
Let us contrast this, and particularly Fig. 142, [Pg 83] with the cube which is placed higher up, viewed from the same standpoint.
Let’s compare this, especially Fig. 142, [Pg 83] with the cube that is positioned higher up, seen from the same perspective.
Flattened Perspective.—Fig. 144 shows the new perspective, in which the three vertical lines (A, A, A) are of equal length, and the six angularly disposed lines (B, C) are of equal length, but shorter than the lines A. The only change which has been made is to shorten the distance across the corner from D to D, but the vertical lines (A) are the same in length as the corresponding lines in Fig. 143. Notwithstanding this change the cubes in both figures appear to be of the same size, as, in fact, they really are.
Flat Perspective.—Fig. 144 shows the new perspective, where the three vertical lines (A, A, A) are all the same length, and the six angled lines (B, C) are also the same length, but shorter than the lines A. The only adjustment made was to reduce the distance across the corner from D to D, but the vertical lines (A) remain the same length as the corresponding lines in Fig. 143. Despite this change, the cubes in both figures look like they are the same size, which they actually are.
In forming a perspective, therefore, it would be a good idea for the boy to have a cube of wood always at hand, which, if laid down on a horizontal support, alongside, or within range of the object to [Pg 84] be drawn, will serve as a guide to the perspective.
In creating a perspective, it would be helpful for the boy to always have a wooden cube nearby. If he places it on a flat surface, next to or within sight of the object he wants to draw, it will act as a guide for the perspective. [Pg 84]
Technical Designations.—As all geometrical lines have designations, I have incorporated such figures as will be most serviceable to the boy, each figure being accompanied by its proper definition.
Tech Designations.—Since all geometric lines have names, I’ve included figures that will be most helpful to the student, with each figure accompanied by its correct definition.
Before passing to that subject I can better show some of the simple forms by means of suitable diagrams.
Before moving on to that topic, I can better illustrate some of the basic shapes with appropriate diagrams.
Referring to Fig. 145, let us direct our attention to the body (G), formed by the line (D) across the circle. This body is called a segment. A chord (D) and a curve comprise a segment.
Referring to Fig. 145, let's focus on the body (G), created by the line (D) that crosses the circle. This body is known as a segment. A chord (D) and a curve make up a segment.
Sector and Segment.—Now examine the shape of the body formed by two of the radial lines (E, E) and that part of the circle which extends from one radial line to the other. The body thus formed is a sector, and it is made by two radiating lines and a curved line. Learn to distinguish readily, in your mind, the difference between the two figures.
Sector and Segment.—Now take a look at the shape created by two of the radial lines (E, E) and the part of the circle that stretches from one radial line to the other. The shape formed is called a sector, and it consists of two radiating lines and a curved line. Practice recognizing the difference between the two figures easily in your mind.
[Pg 85] Terms of Angles.—The relation of the lines to each other, the manner in which they are joined together, and their comparative angles, all have special terms and meanings. Thus, referring to the isometric cube, in Fig. 145, the angle formed at the center by the lines (B, E) is different from the angle formed at the margin by the lines (E, F). The angle formed by B, E is called an exterior angle; and that formed by E, F is an interior angle. If you will draw a line (G) from the center to the circle line, so it intersects it at C, the lines B, D, G form an equilateral or isosceles triangle; if you draw a chord (A) from C to C, the lines H, E, F will form an obtuse triangle, and B, F, H a right-angled triangle.
[Pg 85] Angle Terms.—The relationship between lines, how they connect, and their relative angles all have specific terms and meanings. For example, looking at the isometric cube in Fig. 145, the angle formed at the center by lines (B, E) is different from the angle formed at the edge by lines (E, F). The angle formed by B and E is called an exterior angle, while the angle formed by E and F is an interior angle. If you draw a line (G) from the center to the circle line, intersecting it at point C, the lines B, D, and G create an equilateral or isosceles triangle. If you draw a chord (A) from C to C, the lines H, E, and F will form an obtuse triangle, and B, F, and H will form a right triangle.
Circles and Curves.—Circles, and, in fact, all forms of curved work, are the most difficult for beginners. The simplest figure is the circle, which, if it represents a raised surface, is provided with a heavy line on the lower right-hand side, as in Fig. 146; but the proper artistic expression is shown in Fig. 147, in which the lower right-hand side is shaded in rings running only a part of the way around, gradually diminishing in length, and spaced farther and farther apart as you approach the center, thus giving the appearance of a sphere.
Shapes and Curves.—Circles, and basically all types of curved shapes, are the hardest for beginners. The simplest shape is the circle, which, if it represents a raised surface, has a bold line on the lower right side, like in Fig. 146; however, the true artistic expression is shown in Fig. 147, where the lower right side is shaded with rings that only go partway around, getting shorter and spaced wider apart as you move toward the center, creating the illusion of a sphere.
Irregular Curves.—But the irregular curves require the most care to form properly. Let us try [Pg 86] first the elliptical curve (Fig. 148). The proper thing is, first, to draw a line (A), which is called the "major axis." On this axis we mark for our guidance two points (B, B). With the dividers find a point (C) exactly midway, and draw a cross line (D). This is called the "minor axis." If we choose to do so we may indicate two points (E, E) on the minor axis, which, in this case, for convenience, are so spaced that the distance along the major axis, between B, B, is twice the length across the minor axis (D), along E, E. Now find one-quarter of the distance from B to C, as at F, and with a compass pencil make a half circle (G). If, now, you will set the compass point on the center mark (C), and the pencil point of the compass on B, and measure along the minor axis (D) on both [Pg 87] sides of the major axis, you will make two points, as at H. These points are your centers for scribing the long sides of the ellipse. Before proceeding to strike the curved lines (J), draw a diagonal line (K) from H to each marking point (F). Do this on both sides of the major axis, and produce these lines so they cross the curved lines (G). When you ink in your ellipse do not allow the circle pen to cross the lines (K), and you will have a mechanical ellipse.
Irregular Shapes.—However, irregular curves need the most attention to shape correctly. Let's start with the elliptical curve (Fig. 148). First, draw a line (A), known as the "major axis." On this axis, mark two points (B, B) for guidance. Using dividers, find a point (C) exactly in the middle, and draw a cross line (D), which is called the "minor axis." If you want, you can mark two points (E, E) on the minor axis, spaced so that the distance between B and B along the major axis is twice the length across the minor axis (D), along E and E. Now find one-quarter of the distance from B to C at F, and use a compass pencil to draw a half circle (G). Next, place the compass point on the center mark (C) and the pencil point on B, then measure along the minor axis (D) on both sides of the major axis to create two points, like H. These points serve as your centers for drawing the long sides of the ellipse. Before creating the curved lines (J), draw a diagonal line (K) from H to each marking point (F). Do this on both sides of the major axis, extending these lines to cross the curved lines (G). When you ink in your ellipse, avoid letting the circle pen cross the lines (K), and you will achieve a mechanical ellipse.
Ellipses and Ovals.—It is not necessary to measure the centering points (F) at certain specified distances from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines. We may take any point along the major axis, as shown, for instance, in Fig. 149. Let B be this point, taken at random. Then describe the half circle (C). We may, also, arbitrarily, take any point, as, for instance, D on the minor axis E, and by drawing the diagonal lines (F) we find marks on the circle (C), which are the meeting lines for the large curve (H), with the small curve (C). In this case we have formed an ovate or an oval form. Experience will soon make perfect in following out these directions.
Ellipses and Ovals.—You don't need to measure the center points (F) at specific distances from where the horizontal and vertical lines intersect. You can pick any point along the major axis, like the one shown in Fig. 149, which we'll call B, chosen at random. Then draw the half circle (C). You can also randomly choose another point, such as D, on the minor axis E, and by drawing the diagonal lines (F), you'll find marks on the circle (C) that indicate where the large curve (H) meets the small curve (C). In this way, we've created an oval shape. With a bit of practice, you'll soon master these instructions.
Focal Points.—The focal point of a circle is its center, and is called the focus. But an ellipse has two focal points, called foci, represented by F, F in Fig. 148, and by B, B in Fig. 149.
Focus Areas.—The focal point of a circle is its center, known as the focus. In contrast, an ellipse has two focal points, called foci, represented by F, F in Fig. 148, and by B, B in Fig. 149.
[Pg 88] A produced line is one which extends out beyond the marking point. Thus in Fig. 148 that part of the line K between F and G represents the produced portion of line K.
[Pg 88] A produced line is one that goes beyond the marking point. So, in Fig. 148, the section of line K between F and G shows the produced part of line K.
Spirals.—There is no more difficult figure to make with a bow or a circle pen than a spiral. In Fig. 150 a horizontal and a vertical line (A, B), respectively, are drawn, and at their intersection a small circle (C) is formed. This now provides for four centering points for the circle pen, on the two lines (A, B). Intermediate these points indicate a second set of marks halfway between the marks on the lines. If you will now set the point of the compass at, say, the mark 3, and the pencil point of the compass at D, and make a curved mark one-eighth of the way around, say, to the radial line (E), then put the point of the [Pg 89] compass to 4, and extend the pencil point of the compass so it coincides with the curved line just drawn, and then again make another curve, one-eighth of a complete circle, and so on around the entire circle of marking points, successively, you will produce a spiral, which, although not absolutely accurate, is the nearest approach with a circle pen. To make this neatly requires care and patience.
Spirals.—Creating a spiral with a bow or a circle pen is one of the most challenging shapes to make. In Fig. 150, there's a horizontal line (A) and a vertical line (B), and where they intersect, a small circle (C) is drawn. This gives you four center points for the circle pen along the two lines (A, B). Between these points, you should mark a second set of points halfway between the marks on the lines. Now, if you set the point of the compass at, say, mark 3, and the pencil point at D, make a curved mark one-eighth of the way around to the radial line (E). Then, set the point of the compass to 4 and adjust the pencil point so it aligns with the previously drawn curve, and then make another curve, one-eighth of a complete circle, and continue this around the entire circle of marking points. This process will create a spiral that may not be perfectly accurate, but it's the closest you can get with a circle pen. Achieving this neatly requires careful attention and patience.
Perpendicular and Vertical.—A few words now as to terms. The boy is often confused in determining the difference between perpendicular and vertical. There is a pronounced difference. Vertical means up and down. It is on a line in the direction a ball takes when it falls straight toward the center of the earth. The word perpendicular, as usually employed in astronomy, means the same thing, but in geometry, or in drafting, or in its use in the arts it means that a perpendicular [Pg 90] line is at right angles to some other line. Suppose you put a square upon a roof so that one leg of the square extends up and down on the roof, and the other leg projects outwardly from the roof. In this case the projecting leg is perpendicular to the roof. Never use the word vertical in this connection.
Perpendicular and Vertical.—A few words now about the terms. The boy often gets confused about the difference between perpendicular and vertical. There is a clear distinction. Vertical means up and down. It follows the path that a ball takes when it falls straight toward the center of the earth. The term perpendicular, as usually used in astronomy, has a similar meaning, but in geometry, drafting, or its use in the arts, it means that a perpendicular line is at right angles to another line. Imagine placing a square on a roof so that one leg of the square goes up and down on the roof, while the other leg extends out from the roof. In this case, the extending leg is perpendicular to the roof. Never use the word vertical in this context.
Signs to Indicate Measurements.—The small circle (°) is always used to designate degree. Thus 10° means ten degrees.
Measurement Indicators.—The small circle (°) is always used to represent degree. So, 10° means ten degrees.
Feet are indicated by the single mark '; and two closely allied marks " are for inches. Thus five feet ten inches should be written 5' 10". A large cross (×) indicates the word "by," and in expressing the term six feet by three feet two inches, it should be written 6' × 3'2".
Feet are represented by the single mark '; and two closely related marks " are for inches. So five feet ten inches should be written 5' 10". A large cross (×) means "by," so to express six feet by three feet two inches, it should be written 6' × 3'2".
The foregoing figures give some of the fundamentals necessary to be acquired, and it may be said that if the boy will learn the principles involved in the drawings he will have no difficulty in producing intelligible work; but as this is not a treatise on drawing we cannot go into the more refined phases of the subject.
The previous figures provide some key basics to grasp, and it can be said that if the boy learns the principles behind the drawings, he will have no trouble producing clear work; however, since this isn't a guide on drawing, we can’t delve into the more detailed aspects of the topic.
Definitions.—The following figures show the various geometrical forms and their definitions:
Definitions.—The following figures illustrate the different geometric shapes and their definitions:
151. Abscissa.—The point in a curve, A, which is referred to by certain lines, such as B, which extend out from an axis, X, or the ordinate line Z.
151. Abscissa.—The point on a curve, A, that is defined by specific lines, like B, which extend from an axis, X, or the vertical line Z.
[Pg 91] 152. Angle.—The inclosed space near the point where two lines meet.
[Pg 91] 152. Angle.—The area formed at the point where two lines intersect.
153. Apothegm.—The perpendicular line A from the center to one side of a regular polygon. It represents the radial line of a polygon the same as the radius represents half the diameter of a circle.
153. Apothegm.—The straight line A from the center to one side of a regular polygon. It represents the radial line of a polygon just like the radius represents half the diameter of a circle.
154. Apsides or Apsis.—One of two points, A, A, of an orbit, oval or ellipse farthest from the axis, or the two small dots.
154. Apsides or Apsis.—One of two points, A, A, of an orbit, oval or ellipse, that is farthest from the axis, or the two small dots.
155. Chord.—A right line, as A, uniting the extremities of the arc of a circle or a curve.
155. Chord.—A straight line, like A, connecting the endpoints of the arc of a circle or a curve.
156. Convolute (see also Involute).—Usually employed to designate a wave or folds in opposite directions. A double involute.
156. Convolute (see also Involute).—Usually used to refer to a wave or folds that go in opposite directions. A double involute.
157. Conic Section.—Having the form of or resembling a cone. Formed by cutting off a cone at any angle. See line A.
157. Conic Section.—Having the shape of or resembling a cone. Created by slicing through a cone at any angle. See line A.
158. Conoid.—Anything that has a form resembling that of a cone.
158. Conoid.—Anything that has a shape similar to that of a cone.
159. Cycloid.—A curve, A, generated by a point, B, in the plane of a circle or wheel, C, when the wheel is rolled along a straight line.
159. Cycloid.—A curve, A, created by a point, B, on the surface of a circle or wheel, C, as the wheel rolls along a straight line.
160. Ellipsoid.—A solid, all plane sections of which are ellipses or circles.
160. Ellipsoid.—A solid with all flat sections being either ellipses or circles.
161. Epicycloid.—A curve, A, traced by a point, B, in the circumference of a wheel, C, which rolls on the convex side of a fixed circle, D.
161. Epicycloid.—A curve, A, created by a point, B, on the edge of a wheel, C, as it rolls along the outer side of a stationary circle, D.
162. Evolute.—A curve, A, from which another curve, like B, on each of the inner ends of the lines C is made. D is a spool, and the lines C represent a thread at different positions. The thread has a marker, E, so that when the thread is wound on the spool the marker E makes the evolute line A.
162. Evolute.—A curve, A, is created from another curve, like B, at each of the inner ends of the lines C. D is a spool, and the lines C represent a thread at different positions. The thread has a marker, E, so that when the thread is wound on the spool, the marker E creates the evolute line A.
163. Focus.—The center, A, of a circle; also one of the two centering points, B, of an ellipse or an oval.
163. Focus.—The center, A, of a circle; also one of the two focal points, B, of an ellipse or an oval.
164. Gnome.—The space included between the boundary lines of two similar parallelograms, the one within the other, with an angle in common.
164. Gnome.—The area between the boundary lines of two identical parallelograms, one inside the other, sharing a common angle.
165. Hyperbola.—A curve, A, formed by the section of a cone. If the cone is cut off vertically on the dotted line, A, the curve is a hyperbola. See Parabola.
165. Hyperbola.—A curve, A, created by slicing through a cone. If the cone is cut vertically along the dotted line, A, the resulting curve is a hyperbola. See Parabola.
167. Hypothenuse.—The side, A, of a right-angled triangle which is opposite to the right angle B, C. A, regular triangle; C, irregular triangle.
167. Hypotenuse.—The side, A, of a right triangle that is opposite the right angle B, C. A, regular triangle; C, irregular triangle.
[Pg 92] 168. Incidence.—The angle, A, which is the same angle as, for instance, a ray of light, B, which falls on a mirror, C. The line D is the perpendicular.
[Pg 92] 168. Incidence.—The angle, A, is the same angle as a ray of light, B, that hits a mirror, C. The line D is the perpendicular.
169. Isosceles Triangle.—Having two sides or legs, A, A, that are equal.
169. Isosceles Triangle.—Having two sides or legs, A, A, that are the same length.
170. Parabola.—One of the conic sections formed by cutting of a cone so that the cut line, A, is not vertical. See Hyperbola where the cut line is vertical.
170. Parabola.—One of the conic sections created by cutting a cone in such a way that the cut line, A, is not vertical. See Hyperbola where the cut line is vertical.
171. Parallelogram.—A right-lined quadrilateral figure, whose opposite sides, A, A, or B, B, are parallel and consequently equal.
171. Parallelogram.—A quadrilateral shape with straight sides, where the opposite sides, A, A, or B, B, are parallel and therefore equal.
172. Pelecoid.—A figure, somewhat hatchet-shaped, bounded by a semicircle, A, and two inverted quadrants, and equal to a square, C.
172. Pelecoid.—A shape that resembles a hatchet, surrounded by a semicircle, A, and two flipped quadrants, and is equivalent to a square, C.
173. Polygons.—Many-sided and many with angles.
173. Polygons.—Shapes with multiple angles.
174. Pyramid.—A solid structure generally with a square base and having its sides meeting in an apex or peak. The peak is the vertex.
174. Pyramid.—A solid structure usually with a square base and its sides coming together at a point or peak. The peak is the vertex.
175. Quadrant.—The quarter of a circle or of the circumference of a circle. A horizontal line, A, and a vertical line, B, make the four quadrants, like C.
175. Quadrant.—A quarter of a circle or the circumference of a circle. A horizontal line, A, and a vertical line, B, create the four quadrants, like C.
176. Quadrilateral.—A plane figure having four sides, and consequently four angles. Any figure formed by four lines.
176. Quadrilateral.—A flat shape with four sides, and therefore four angles. Any shape created by four lines.
177. Rhomb.—An equilateral parallelogram or a quadrilateral figure whose sides are equal and the opposite sides, B, B, parallel.
177. Rhomb.—A rhombus is an equilateral parallelogram or a four-sided shape with equal sides, where the opposite sides, B, B, are parallel.
178. Sector.—A part, A, of a circle formed by two radial lines, B, B, and bounded at the end by a curve.
178. Sector.—A section, A, of a circle created by two radii, B, B, and enclosed at the end by a curved line.
179. Segment.—A part, A, cut from a circle by a straight line, B. The straight line, B, is the chord or the segmental line.
179. Segment.—A piece, A, taken from a circle by a straight line, B. The straight line, B, is the chord or the segmental line.
180. Sinusoid.—A wave-like form. It may be regular or irregular.
180. Sinusoid.—A wave-like shape. It can be regular or irregular.
181. Tangent.—A line, A, running out from the curve at right angles from a radial line.
181. Tangent.—A line, A, extending from the curve at a right angle to a radial line.
182. Tetrahedron.—A solid figure enclosed or bounded by four triangles, like A or B. A plain pyramid is bounded by five triangles.
182. Tetrahedron.—A solid shape enclosed or surrounded by four triangles, like A or B. A regular pyramid is surrounded by five triangles.
183. Vertex.—The meeting point, A, of two or more lines.
183. Vertex.—The point, A, where two or more lines meet.
184. Volute.—A spiral scroll, used largely in architecture, which forms one of the chief features of the Ionic capital.
184. Volute.—A spiral scroll commonly used in architecture, which is one of the main characteristics of the Ionic capital.
[Pg 93]
[Pg 93]
CHAPTER IX
MOLDINGS, WITH PRACTICAL ILLUSTRATIONS IN EMBELLISHING WORK
Moldings.—The use of moldings was early resorted to by the nations of antiquity, and we marvel to-day at many of the beautiful designs which the Phœnecians, the Greeks and the Romans produced. If you analyze the lines used you will be surprised to learn how few are the designs which go to make up the wonderful columns, spires, minarets and domes which are represented in the various types of architecture.
Moldings.—Ancient civilizations were some of the first to use moldings, and we still admire the beautiful designs created by the Phoenicians, Greeks, and Romans today. If you take a closer look at the lines they used, you'll be surprised to find how few designs contribute to the stunning columns, spires, minarets, and domes seen in various architectural styles.
The Basis of Moldings.—Suppose we take the base type of moldings, and see how simple they are and then, by using these forms, try to build up or ornament some article of furniture, as an example of their utility.
The Basics of Moldings.—Let’s take the basic type of moldings and examine how simple they are. Then, using these forms, we can try to enhance or decorate a piece of furniture as an example of their usefulness.
The Simplest Molding.—In Fig. 185 we show a molding of the most elementary character known, being simply in the form of a band (A) placed below the cap. Such a molding gives to the article on which it is placed three distinct lines, C, D and E, If you stop to consider you will note that the molding, while it may add to the strength of the article, is primarily of service [Pg 94] because the lines and surfaces produce shadows, and therefore become valuable in an artistic sense.
The Easiest Molding.—In Fig. 185, we show a molding that is very basic, simply a band (A) positioned beneath the cap. This type of molding gives the object it’s attached to three distinct lines, C, D, and E. If you think about it, you'll realize that while the molding may enhance the strength of the object, its main purpose is to create shadows through the lines and surfaces, making it valuable from an artistic perspective. [Pg 94]
The Astragal.—Fig. 186 shows the ankle-bone molding, technically called the Astragal. This form is round, and properly placed produces a good effect, as it throws the darkest shadow of any form of molding.
The Astragalus.—Fig. 186 shows the ankle-bone molding, technically called the Astragal. This shape is round, and when it's positioned correctly, it creates a nice effect, as it casts the darkest shadow of any type of molding.
The Cavetto.—Fig. 187 is the cavetto, or round type. Its proper use gives a delicate outline, but it is principally applied with some other form of molding.
The Cavetto.—Fig. 187 is the cavetto, or round type. When used correctly, it creates a delicate outline, but it is mostly combined with other types of molding.
The Ovolo.—Fig. 188, called the ovolo, is a quarter round molding with the lobe (A) projecting downwardly. It is distinguished from [Pg 95] the astragal because it casts less of a shadow above and below.
The Ovolo.—Fig. 188, known as the ovolo, is a quarter-round molding with the lobe (A) projecting downward. It is different from the astragal because it casts less shadow above and below. [Pg 95]
The Torus.—Fig. 189, known as the torus, is a modified form of the ovolo, but the lobe (A) projects out horizontally instead of downwardly.
The Torus.—Fig. 189, called the torus, is a modified version of the ovolo, but the lobe (A) sticks out horizontally instead of downward.
The Apophyges (Pronounced apof-i-ges).—Fig. 190 is also called the scape, and is a concaved type of molding, being a hollowed curvature used on columns where its form causes a merging of the shaft with the fillet.
The Apophyges (Pronounced apof-i-ges).—Fig. 190 is also known as the scape and is a concaved type of molding. It features a hollow curvature that is used on columns to blend the shaft with the fillet.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 189. Torus. Fig. 189. Torus. |
Fig. 190. Apophyge. Fig. 190. Apophyge. |
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 191. Cymatium. Fig. 191. Cymatium. |
Fig. 192. Ogee-Recta. Fig. 192. Ogee-Recta. |
The Cymatium.—Fig. 191 is the cymatium (derived from the word cyme), meaning wave-like. This form must be in two curves, one inwardly and one outwardly.
The Cymatium.—Fig. 191 shows the cymatium (from the word cyme), which means wave-like. This shape consists of two curves, one curving inward and the other outward.
The Ogee.—Fig. 192, called the ogee, is the most useful of all moldings, for two reasons: First, it may have the concaved surface uppermost, in which form it is called ogee recta—that is, right [Pg 96] side up; or it may be inverted, as in Fig. 193, with the concaved surface below, and is then called ogee reversa. Contrast these two views and you will note what a difference the mere inversion of the strip makes in the appearance. Second, because the ogee has in it, in a combined form, the outlines of nearly all the other types. The only advantage there is in using the other types is because you may thereby build up and space your work better than by using only one simple form.
The Ogee.—Fig. 192, known as the ogee, is the most versatile of all moldings for two reasons: First, it can have the concave surface on top, in which case it’s called ogee recta—meaning right side up; or it can be flipped upside down, as in Fig. 193, with the concave surface on the bottom, and then it's referred to as ogee reversa. If you compare these two views, you’ll see how much the simple inversion of the strip changes its appearance. Second, the ogee combines the shapes of nearly all the other types. The only benefit of using other types is that they allow you to arrange and space your work better than if you only used one simple form.
You will notice that the ogee is somewhat like the cymatium, the difference being that the concaved part is not so pronounced as in the ogee, and the convexed portion bulges much further than in the ogee. It is capable of use with other moldings, and may be reversed with just as good effect as the ogee.
You’ll see that the ogee is similar to the cymatium, but the concave part isn’t as deep as in the ogee, and the convex part sticks out much more than in the ogee. It can be used with other moldings and can be flipped around with just as good an effect as the ogee.
[Pg 97] The Reedy.—Fig. 194 represents the reedy, or the bead—that is, it is made up of reeds. It is a type of molding which should not be used with any other pronounced type of molding.
[Pg 97] The Reedy.—Fig. 194 shows the reedy, or the bead—that is, it's made up of reeds. It's a type of molding that shouldn't be combined with any other distinct type of molding.
The Casement (Fig. 195).—In this we have a form of molding used almost exclusively at the base of structures, such as columns, porticoes and like work.
The Casement (Fig. 195).—This is a type of molding used almost exclusively at the base of structures, like columns, porticoes, and similar work.
Now, before proceeding to use these moldings, let us examine a Roman-Doric column, one of the most famous types of architecture produced. We shall see how the ancients combined moldings to produce grace, lights and shadows and artistic effects.
Now, before we use these moldings, let’s take a look at a Roman-Doric column, one of the most famous architectural styles. We will see how the ancients combined moldings to create elegance, light and shadow, and artistic effects.
The Roman-Doric Column.—In Fig. 196 is shown a Roman-Doric column, in which the cymatium, the ovolo, cavetto, astragal and the ogee are used, together with the fillets, bases and caps, and it is interesting to study this because of its beautiful proportions.
The Roman-Doric Column.—In Fig. 196, you can see a Roman-Doric column that features the cymatium, ovolo, cavetto, astragal, and ogee, along with the fillets, bases, and caps. It's fascinating to examine this column due to its beautiful proportions.
[Pg 98]
[Pg 98]
The pedestal and base are equal in vertical dimensions to the entablature and capital. The entablature is but slightly narrower than the pedestal; [Pg 99] and the length of the column is, approximately, four times the height of the pedestal. The base of the shaft, while larger diametrically than the capital, is really shorter measured vertically. There is a reason for this. The eye must travel a greater distance to reach the upper end of the shaft, and is also at a greater angle to that part of the shaft, hence it appears shorter, while it is in reality longer. For this reason a capital must be longer or taller than the base of a shaft, and it is also smaller in diameter.
The pedestal and base are the same vertical height as the entablature and capital. The entablature is slightly narrower than the pedestal; [Pg 99] and the column is about four times the height of the pedestal. The base of the shaft, while wider in diameter than the capital, is actually shorter when measured vertically. There’s a reason for this. The eye has to travel a longer distance to reach the top of the shaft and is at a steeper angle to that part, so it looks shorter, even though it’s actually longer. Because of this, a capital needs to be taller than the base of the shaft, and it is also smaller in diameter.
It will be well to study the column not only on account of the wonderful blending of the various forms of moldings, but because it will impress you with a sense of proportions, and give you an idea of how simple lines may be employed to great advantage in all your work.
It’s a good idea to study the column not just for its amazing mix of different molding styles, but also because it will give you an idea of proportions and show you how you can use simple lines effectively in all your work.
Lessons from the Doric Column.—As an example, suppose we take a plain cabinet, and endeavor to embellish it with the types of molding described, and you will see to what elaboration the operation may be carried.
Lessons from the Doric column.—For instance, let's take a simple cabinet and try to decorate it using the types of molding described, and you'll see how far we can take this process.
Applying Molding.—Let Fig. 197 represent the front, top and bottom of our cabinet; and the first thing we shall do is to add a base (A) and a cap (B). Now, commencing at the top, suppose we utilize the simplest form of molding, the band.
Applying Molding.—Let Fig. 197 show the front, top, and bottom of our cabinet; and the first thing we will do is to add a base (A) and a cap (B). Now, starting at the top, let’s use the simplest type of molding, the band.
This we may make of any desired width, as [Pg 100] shown in Fig. 198. On this band we can apply the ogee type (Fig. 199) right side up.
This can be made in any width we want, as [Pg 100] shown in Fig. 198. On this band, we can place the ogee type (Fig. 199) right side up.
But for variation we may decide to use the ogee reversed, as in Fig. 200. This will afford us something else to think about and will call upon our powers of initiative in order to finish off the lower margin or edge of the ogee reversa.
But for variety, we might choose to use the reversed ogee, as shown in Fig. 200. This will give us something different to consider and will require our creativity to complete the lower margin or edge of the reversed ogee.
If we take the ogee recta, as shown in Fig. 201, we may use the cavetto, or the ovolo (Fig. 202); but if we use the ogee reversa we must use a convex molding like the cavetto at one base, and [Pg 101] a convex molding, like the torus or the ovolo, at the other base.
If we take the ogee recta, as shown in Fig. 201, we can use the cavetto or the ovolo (Fig. 202); but if we use the ogee reversa, we have to use a convex molding like the cavetto on one base, and a convex molding like the torus or the ovolo on the other base. [Pg 101]
In the latter (Fig. 202) four different moldings are used with the ogee as the principal structure.
In the latter (Fig. 202), four different moldings are used, with the ogee as the main structure.
Base Embellishments.—In like manner (Fig. 204) the base may have the casement type first attached in the corner, and then the ovolo, or the astragal added, as in Fig. 203.
Base Enhancements.—Similarly (Fig. 204), the base can have the casement type first added at the corner, followed by the ovolo or the astragal, as shown in Fig. 203.
Straight-faced Moldings.—Now let us carry the principle still further, and, instead of using various type of moldings, we will employ nothing but straight strips of wood. This treatment will soon indicate to you that the true mechanic or artisan is he who can take advantage of whatever he finds at hand.
Straight-faced Moldings.—Now let's take this idea even further, and instead of using different types of moldings, we'll use only straight strips of wood. This approach will quickly show you that the real craftsman or artisan is someone who can make the most of whatever materials they have available.
Let us take the same cabinet front (Fig. 205), and below the cap (A) place a narrow strip (B), the lower corner of which has been chamfered off, as at C. Below the strip B is a thinner strip (D), vertically disposed, and about two-thirds its width. The lower corner of this is also chamfered, as at [Pg 102] F. To finish, apply a small strip (G) in the corner, and you have an embellished top that has the appearance, from a short distance, of being made up of molding.
Let’s take the same cabinet front (Fig. 205), and place a narrow strip (B) below the cap (A), with the lower corner chamfered off, like at C. Below strip B, add a thinner strip (D), positioned vertically and about two-thirds the width of strip B. The lower corner of this strip is also chamfered, as shown at [Pg 102] F. To finish, attach a small strip (G) in the corner, and you’ll have a decorative top that looks like it’s made of molding from a distance.
Plain Molded Base.—The base may be treated in the same manner. The main strip (4) has its upper corner chamfered off, as at I, and on this is nailed a thin, narrow finishing strip (J). The upper part or molded top, in this case, has eleven distinct lines, and the base has six lines. By experimenting you may soon put together the most available kinds of molding strips.
Plain Molded Base.—You can treat the base the same way. The main strip (4) has its upper corner beveled off, like at I, and a thin, narrow finishing strip (J) is nailed to it. The top part, or molded top, in this case, has eleven distinct lines, while the base has six lines. By experimenting, you'll quickly find the most suitable types of molding strips to use.
Diversified Uses.—For a great overhang you may use the cavetto, or the apophyges, and below that the astragal or the torus; and for the base the casement is the most serviceable molding, and it may be finished off with the ovolo or the cymatium.
Various Applications.—For a wide overhang, you can use the cavetto or the apophyges, and beneath that, the astragal or the torus; for the base, the casement is the most useful molding, and it can be completed with the ovolo or the cymatium.
Pages of examples might be cited to show the variety and the diversification available with different types.
Pages of examples could be provided to illustrate the range and diversity offered by different types.
[Pg 103] Shadows Cast by Moldings.—Always bear in mind that a curved surface makes a blended shadow. A straight, flat or plain surface does not, and it is for that reason the concaved and the convexed surfaces, brought out by moldings, become so important.
[Pg 103] Shadows Cast by Trim.—Always remember that a curved surface creates a smooth shadow. A straight, flat, or plain surface does not, which is why the concave and convex surfaces made by moldings are so important.
A little study and experimenting will soon teach you how a convex, a concave or a flat surface, and a corner or corners should be arranged relatively to each other; how much one should project beyond the other; and what the proportional widths of the different molding bands should be. An entire volume would scarcely exhaust this subject.
A bit of study and experimentation will quickly show you how to position a convex, concave, or flat surface, as well as corners in relation to one another; how far one should extend beyond the other; and what the proportional widths of the various molding bands should be. A whole book wouldn’t fully cover this topic.
[Pg 104]
[Pg 104]
CHAPTER X
AN ANALYSIS OF TENONING, MORTISING, RABBETING AND BEADING
In the chapter on How Work is Laid Out, an example was given of the particular manner pursued in laying out mortises and tenons, and also dovetailed work. I deem it advisable to add some details to the subject, as well as to direct attention to some features which do not properly belong to the laying out of work.
In the chapter on How Work is Laid Out, an example was provided of the specific method used for creating mortises and tenons, as well as dovetail joints. I think it's important to add some details to this topic and to point out some aspects that don't really fit into the process of laying out work.
Where Mortises Should Be Used.—Most important of all is a general idea of places and conditions under which mortises should be resorted to. There are four ways in which different members may be secured to each other. First, by mortises and tenons; second, by a lap-and-butt; third, by scarfing; and, fourth, by tonguing and grooving.
Where to Use Mortises.—Most importantly, it's essential to understand the places and situations where mortises should be utilized. There are four methods to connect different parts to each other. First, using mortises and tenons; second, by lap-and-butt joints; third, by scarf joints; and fourth, by tongue and groove.
Depth of Mortises.—When a certain article is to be made, the first consideration is, how the joint or joints shall be made. The general rule for using the tenon and mortise is where two parts are joined wherein the grains of the two [Pg 105] members run at right angles to each other, as in the following figure.
Mortise Depth.—When making a particular item, the first thing to consider is how the joint or joints will be constructed. The general rule for using the tenon and mortise is for situations where two parts are connected and the grains of both pieces run at right angles to one another, as shown in the following figure.
Rule for Mortises.—Fig. 206 shows such an example. You will notice this in doors particularly, as an example of work.
Mortise rules.—Fig. 206 illustrates an example of this. You’ll especially see this in doors as a demonstration of craftsmanship.
The next consideration is, shall the mortises be cut entirely through the piece? This is answered by the query as to whether or not the end of the tenon will be exposed; and usually, if a smooth finish is required, the mortise should not go through the member. In a door, however, the tenons are exposed at the edges of the door, and are, therefore, seen, so that we must apply some other rule. The one universally adopted is, that where, as in a door stile, it is broad and comparatively thin, or where the member having the mortise [Pg 106] in its edge is much thinner than its width, the mortise should go through from edge to edge.
The next thing to consider is whether the mortises should be cut all the way through the piece. This depends on whether the end of the tenon will be visible or not; usually, if a smooth finish is needed, the mortise should not go all the way through the member. In a door, however, the tenons are visible at the edges, so we need to follow a different rule. The commonly accepted guideline is that when, as in a door stile, it is wide and relatively thin, or when the member with the mortise in its edge is much thinner than its width, the mortise should be cut through from edge to edge. [Pg 106]
The reason for this lies in the inability to sink the mortises through the stile (A, Fig. 207) perfectly true, and usually the job is turned out something like the illustration shows. The side of the rail (B) must be straight with the side of the stile. If the work is done by machinery it results in accuracy unattainable in hand work.
The reason for this is the difficulty in perfectly aligning the mortises with the stile (A, Fig. 207), and as a result, the finished product often looks like the illustration. The side of the rail (B) needs to be straight with the side of the stile. If the work is done with machines, it achieves a level of accuracy that’s impossible to get with handwork.
True Mortise Work.—The essense of good joining work is the ability to sink the chisel true with the side of the member. More uneven work is produced by haste than by inability. The tendency [Pg 107] of all beginners is to strike the chisel too hard, in order the more quickly to get down to the bottom of the mortise. Hence, bad work follows.
Authentic Mortise Work.—The key to good joinery is the skill to drive the chisel straight with the edge of the piece. Rushed work leads to more mistakes than lack of skill. Most beginners have a habit of hitting the chisel too hard to quickly reach the bottom of the mortise. As a result, poor quality work occurs. [Pg 107]
Steps in Cutting Mortises.—Examine Fig. 208, which, for convenience, gives six successive steps in making the mortise. The marks a, b designate the limits, or the length, of the mortise. The chisel (C) is not started at the marking line (A), but at least an eighth of an inch from it. The first cut, as at B, gives a starting point for the next cut or placement of the chisel. When the second cut (B) has thus been made, the chisel should be turned around, as in dotted line d, position C, thereby making a finish cut down to the bottom of the mortise, line e, so that when the fourth cut has been made along line f, we are ready for the fifth cut, position C; then the sixth cut, position D, which leaves the mortise as shown at E. Then turn the chisel to the position shown at F, and cut down the last end of the mortise square, as shown in G, and clean out the mortise well before making the finishing cuts on the marking lines (a, b). The particular reason for cleaning out the mortise before making the finish cuts is, that the corners of the mortise are used as fulcrums for the chisels, and the eighth of an inch stock still remaining protects the corners.
Cutting Mortise Steps.—Look at Fig. 208, which shows six easy steps for making a mortise. The marks a, b indicate the boundaries, or the length, of the mortise. Start the chisel (C) not at the marking line (A), but at least an eighth of an inch away from it. The first cut, as shown at B, creates a starting point for the next cut or placement of the chisel. After making the second cut (B), turn the chisel around, as indicated by the dotted line d, position C, and make a finishing cut down to the bottom of the mortise, line e. Once the fourth cut is made along line f, you’re ready for the fifth cut, position C; then the sixth cut, position D, which finishes the mortise as shown at E. Next, turn the chisel to the position shown at F and square off the last end of the mortise, as shown in G, and clean out the mortise thoroughly before making the finishing cuts along the marking lines (a, b). The main reason for cleaning out the mortise before making the finishing cuts is that the corners of the mortise serve as pivot points for the chisels, and the remaining eighth of an inch protects the corners.
[Pg 108] Things to Avoid in Mortising.—You must be careful to refrain from undercutting as your chisel goes down at the lines a, b, because if you commit this error you will make a bad joint.
[Pg 108] Things to Avoid in Mortising.—You need to be careful not to undercut as your chisel works along the lines a, b, because if you make this mistake, it will result in a poor joint.
As much care should be exercised in producing the tenon, although the most common error is apt to occur in making the shoulder. This should be a trifle undercut.
As much care should be taken in making the tenon, though the most frequent mistake tends to happen when creating the shoulder. This should be slightly undercut.
See the lines (A, Fig. 209), which illustrate this.
See the lines (A, Fig. 209), which show this.
Lap-and-Butt Joint.—The lap-and-butt is the form of uniting members which is most generally used to splice together timbers, where they join each other end to end.
Lap and Butt Joint.—The lap-and-butt joint is the most common way to connect timbers when they meet end to end.
Bolts are used to secure the laps.
Bolts are used to fasten the edges.
But the lap-and-butt form is also used in doors and in other cabinet work. It is of great service in paneling.
But the lap-and-butt joint is also used in doors and in other cabinet work. It is very useful in paneling.
[Pg 109] A rabbet is formed to receive the edge of the panel, and a molding is then secured to the other side on the panel, to hold the latter in place.
[Pg 109] A rabbet is made to fit the edge of the panel, and a molding is then attached to the other side of the panel to keep it in position.
Scarfing.—This method of securing members together is the most rigid, and when properly performed makes the joint the strongest part of the timber. Each member (A, Fig. 212) has a step diagonally cut (B), the two steps being on different planes, so they form a hook joint, as at C, and as each point or terminal has a blunt end, the members are so constructed as to withstand a longitudinal strain in either direction. The overlapping plates (D) and the bolts (E) hold the joint rigidly.
Scarfing down food.—This method of joining pieces together is the most solid, and when done correctly, makes the joint the strongest part of the wood. Each piece (A, Fig. 212) has a diagonal cut (B), with the two cuts on different planes, creating a hook joint, as seen at C. Since each end has a blunt tip, the pieces are designed to handle a longitudinal strain in either direction. The overlapping plates (D) and the bolts (E) keep the joint stable.
The Tongue and Groove.—This form of uniting members has only a limited application. It is [Pg 110] serviceable for floors, table tops, paneling, etc. In Fig. 213, a door panel is shown, and the door mullions (B) are also so secured to the rail (C). The tongue-and-groove method is never used by itself. It must always have some support or reinforcing means.
The Tongue and Groove.—This method of joining materials has a specific and limited use. It's useful for floors, table tops, paneling, and so on. In Fig. 213, a door panel is displayed, and the door mullions (B) are also attached to the rail (C) this way. The tongue-and-groove technique is never used on its own. It always requires some kind of support or reinforcement.
Beading.—This part of the work pertains to surface finishings, and may or may not be used in connection with rabbeting.
Beading.—This section of the work relates to surface finishes and may or may not be used alongside rabbeting.
Figs. 214 and 215 show the simplest and most generally adopted forms in which it is made and used in connection with rabbeting, or with the tongue and groove. The bead is placed on one or both sides of that margin of the board (Fig. 214) which has the tongue, and the adjoining board has the usual flooring groove to butt against and receive the tongue. It is frequently the case that a blind bead, as in Fig. 215, runs through [Pg 111] the middle of the board, so as to give the appearance of narrow strips when used for wainscoting, or for ceilings. The beads also serve to hide the joints of the boards.
Figs. 214 and 215 display the simplest and most commonly used designs in which it is made and utilized in conjunction with rabbeting or tongue and groove joints. The bead is applied to one or both sides of the board's edge (Fig. 214) that has the tongue, while the adjacent board features the standard flooring groove to fit against and accommodate the tongue. It's often the case that a blind bead, as shown in Fig. 215, runs through the center of the board, creating the illusion of narrow strips when used for wainscoting or ceilings. The beads also help conceal the joints of the boards.
Ornamental Bead Finish.—These figures show how the bead may be used for finishing corners, edges and projections. Fig. 216 has a bead at each corner of a stile (A), and a finishing strip of half-round material (B) is nailed to the flat edge. Fig. 217 has simply the corners themselves beaded, and it makes a most serviceable finish for the edges of projecting members.
Decorative Bead Finish.—These figures illustrate how the bead can be used to finish corners, edges, and projections. Fig. 216 features a bead at each corner of a stile (A), and a finishing strip made of half-round material (B) is nailed to the flat edge. Fig. 217 shows just the corners themselves beaded, creating a very practical finish for the edges of projecting elements.
Fig. 218, used for wider members, has the corners beaded and a fancy molding (C); or the reduced edge of the stile itself is rounded off.
Fig. 218, designed for wider pieces, features beaded corners and a decorative molding (C); alternatively, the edge of the stile itself is rounded.
The Bead and Rabbet.—A more amplified form of work is available where the rabbet plane is used with the beader. These two planes together [Pg 112] will, if properly used, offer a strong substitute for molding and molding effects.
The Bead and Rabbet.—A more detailed type of work can be done using the rabbet plane along with the beader. When used correctly, these two planes will provide a strong alternative to molding and molding effects. [Pg 112]
Fig. 219 has both sides first rabbeted, as at A, and the corners then beaded, as at B, with the reduced part of the member rounded off, as at C. Or, as in Fig. 220, the reduced edge of the member may have the corners beaded, as at D, and the rabbeted corners filled in with a round or concaved moulding (E).
Fig. 219 has both sides first notched, as at A, and the corners then shaped with a bead, as at B, with the trimmed part of the piece rounded off, as at C. Or, as shown in Fig. 220, the trimmed edge of the piece may have the corners shaped with a bead, as at D, and the notched corners filled in with a round or curved molding (E).
Shading with Beads and Rabbets.—You will see from the foregoing, that these embellishments are serviceable because they provide the article with a large number of angles and surfaces to cast lights and shadows; and for this reason the boy should strive to produce the effects which this class of work requires.
Shading with Beads and Rabbets.—As you've seen from what was previously mentioned, these decorations are useful because they give the item a lot of angles and surfaces to reflect light and create shadows. For this reason, the boy should work hard to achieve the effects that this type of work demands.
[Pg 113]
[Pg 113]
CHAPTER XI
HOUSE BUILDING
House building is the carpenter's craft; cabinet-making the joiner's trade, yet both are so intimately associated, that it is difficult to draw a line. The same tools, the same methods and the same materials are employed.
House building is the carpenter's skill; cabinet-making is the joiner's profession, yet both are so closely linked that it's hard to separate them. The same tools, methods, and materials are used.
There is no trade more ennobling than home building. It is a vocation which touches every man and woman, and to make it really an art is, or should be, the true aspiration of every craftsman.
There’s no profession more uplifting than home building. It’s a field that affects everyone, and turning it into a true art form is, or should be, the genuine goal of every craftsman.
The House and Embellishments.—The refined arts, such as sculpture and painting, merely embellish the home or the castle, so that when we build the structure it should be made with an eye not only to comfort and convenience, but fitting in an artistic and æsthetic sense. It is just as easy to build a beautiful home as an ugly, ungainly, illy proportioned structure.
The House and Decor.—The fine arts, like sculpture and painting, simply add beauty to a home or castle, which means that when we construct the building, we should consider not only comfort and convenience but also an artistic and aesthetic appeal. It's just as easy to create a beautiful home as it is to build an ugly, awkward, poorly proportioned one.
Beauty Not Ornamentation.—The boy, in his early training, should learn this fundamental truth, that beauty, architecturally, does not depend upon ornamentation. Some of the most beautiful structures in the world are very plain. [Pg 114] Beauty consists in proportions, in proper correlation of parts, and in adaptation for the uses to which the structure is to be put.
Beauty Over Ornamentation.—The boy, during his early training, should grasp this essential truth: beauty in architecture doesn’t rely on decoration. Some of the most stunning buildings in the world are quite simple. [Pg 114] Beauty lies in proportions, the appropriate relationship between parts, and their suitability for the intended use of the structure.
Plain Structures.—A house with a plain façade, having a roof properly pitched and with a simple cornice, if joined to a wing which is not ungainly or out of proper proportions, is infinitely more beautiful than a rambling structure, in which one part suggests one order of architecture and the other part some other type or no type at all, and in which the embellishments are out of keeping with the size or pretensions of the house.
Basic Structures.—A house with a simple exterior, featuring a well-pitched roof and a basic cornice, is far more attractive when connected to a wing that is neither awkward nor disproportionate. This is much better than a sprawling design where one section hints at one style of architecture and another section suggests a different style or none at all, and where the decorative elements don't match the size or aspirations of the house.
Colonial Type.—For real beauty, on a larger scale, there is nothing to-day which equals the old Colonial type with the Corinthian columns and entablature. The Lee mansion, now the National Cemetery, at Washington, is a fine example. Such houses are usually square or rectangular in plan, severely plain, with the whole ornamentation consisting of the columns and the portico. This type presents an appearance of massiveness and grandeur and is an excellent illustration of a form wherein the main characteristic of the structure is concentrated or massed at one point.
Colonial Style.—For true beauty on a larger scale, nothing today compares to the old Colonial style with its Corinthian columns and entablature. The Lee mansion, now the National Cemetery in Washington, is a great example. These houses are typically square or rectangular in shape, very simple, with all their decoration coming from the columns and the portico. This style gives an impression of strength and magnificence and serves as an excellent example of a design where the main feature of the building is focused or consolidated in one area.
The Church of the Madelaine, Paris, is another striking example of this period of architecture.
The Church of the Madelaine in Paris is another impressive example of this architectural period.
Of course, it would be out of place with cottages and small houses, but it is well to study and to [Pg 115] know what forms are most available and desirable to adopt, and particularly to know something of the art in which you are interested.
Of course, it wouldn't fit in with cottages and small houses, but it's good to explore and understand which styles are most suitable and appealing to use, and especially to know a bit about the craft that interests you. [Pg 115]
The Roof the Keynote.—Now, there is one thing which should, and does, distinguish the residence from other types of buildings, excepting churches. It is the roof. A house is dominated by its covering. I refer to the modern home. It is not true with the Colonial or the Grecian types. In those the façade or the columns and cornices predominate over everything else.
The Roof is Keynote.—Now, there's one thing that should and does set a house apart from other types of buildings, except for churches. It's the roof. A modern home is defined by its covering. This isn't the case with Colonial or Grecian styles. In those, the facade or the columns and cornices stand out more than everything else.
Bungalow Types.—If you will take up any book on bungalow work and note the outlines of the views you will see that the roof forms the main element or theme. In fact, in most buildings of this kind everything is submerged but the roof and roof details. They are made exceedingly flat, with different pitches with dormers and gables intermingled and indiscriminately placed, with cornices illy assorted and of different kinds, so that the multiplicity of diversified details gives an appearance of great elaboration. Many of those designs are monstrosities and should, if possible, be legally prohibited.
Bungalow Styles.—If you look at any book on bungalow design and check out the outlines of the views, you'll notice that the roof is the main focus. In fact, in most buildings like this, everything is hidden except for the roof and its details. They’re extremely flat, with varying pitches, and have dormers and gables mixed together in random placements, along with poorly matched cornices of different styles, which creates a cluttered look with a lot of intricate details. Many of these designs are eyesores and should, if possible, be legally banned.
I cannot attempt to give even so much as an outline of what constitutes art in its relation to building, but my object is to call attention to this phase of the question, and as you proceed in [Pg 116] your studies and your work you will realize the value and truthfulness of the foregoing observations.
I can't even begin to outline what art means in relation to building, but I want to highlight this aspect of the discussion. As you continue with your studies and work, you'll come to appreciate the importance and accuracy of these earlier remarks. [Pg 116]
General House Building.—We are to treat, generally, on the subject of house building, how the work is laid out, and how built, and in doing so I shall take a concrete example of the work. This can be made more effectual for the purpose if it is on simple lines.
General Home Construction.—We're going to discuss, in general, the topic of house building, how the project is planned out, and how it's constructed. To do this, I’ll use a straightforward example of the work. This will be more effective if it follows simple principles.
Building Plans.—We must first have a plan; and the real carpenter must have the ability to plan as well as to do the work. We want a five-room house, comprising a parlor, dining room, two bedrooms, a kitchen and a bathroom. Just a modest little home, to which we can devote our spare hours, and which will be neat and comfortable when finished. It must be a one-story house, and that fact at once settles the roof question. We can make the house perfectly square in plan, or rectangular, and divide up the space into the proper divisions.
Building plans.—First, we need a plan; and a skilled carpenter should be able to both plan and execute the work. We're looking for a five-room house, including a living room, dining room, two bedrooms, a kitchen, and a bathroom. Just a simple little home to which we can dedicate our free time, and that will be tidy and cozy when it's done. It needs to be a one-story house, which simplifies the roof design. We can choose to make the house perfectly square or rectangular and divide the space into the appropriate sections.
The Plain Square Floor Plan will first be taken up, as it is such an easy roof to build. Of course, it is severely plain.
The Simple Square Floor Plan will be addressed first because it's a simple roof to construct. Of course, it’s very basic.
Fig. 221 shows our proposed plan, drawn in the rough, without any attempts to measure the different apartments, and with the floor plan exactly square. Supposing we run a hall (A) through the middle. On one side of this let us plan for a dining room and a kitchen, a portion of the kitchen space to be given over to a closet and a bathroom.
Fig. 221 shows our proposed plan, sketched out roughly, without measuring the individual rooms, and with the floor plan perfectly square. Let's imagine we have a hall (A) running through the middle. On one side, let's designate space for a dining room and a kitchen, with part of the kitchen area allocated for a closet and a bathroom.
[Pg 117]
[Pg 117]
The chimney (B) must be made accessible from both rooms. On the other side of the hallway the space is divided into a parlor and two bedrooms.
The chimney (B) needs to be accessible from both rooms. On the other side of the hallway, the area is split into a living room and two bedrooms.
[Pg 118] The Rectangular Plan.—In the rectangular floor plan (Fig. 222) a portion of the floor space is cut out for a porch (A), so that we may use the end or the side for the entrance. Supposing we use the end of the house for this purpose. The entrance room (B) may be a bedroom, or a reception and living room, and to the rear of this room is the dining room, connected with the reception room by a hall (C). This hall also leads to the kitchen and to the bathroom, as well as to the other bedroom. The parlor is connected with the entrance room (B), and also with the bedroom. All of this is optional, of course.
[Pg 118] The Rectangle Plan.—In the rectangular floor plan (Fig. 222), a section of the floor space is designed for a porch (A), allowing us to use either the front or the side for the entrance. If we choose to use the front of the house for this, the entrance room (B) can serve as either a bedroom or a reception and living area, with the dining room located behind it and connected to the reception room by a hall (C). This hall also leads to the kitchen, bathroom, and another bedroom. The parlor connects to the entrance room (B) and the bedroom as well. All of this is flexible, of course.
There are also two chimneys, one chimney (D) having two flues and the other chimney (E) having three flues, so that every room is accommodated.
There are also two chimneys, one chimney (D) with two flues and the other chimney (E) with three flues, ensuring that every room is served.
[Pg 119]
[Pg 119]
Room Measurements.—We must now determine the dimensions of each room, and then how we shall build the roof.
Room Dimensions.—We now need to figure out the size of each room and how we are going to construct the roof.
In Figs. 223 and 224, we have now drawn out [Pg 120] in detail the sizes, the locations of the door and windows, the chimneys and the closets, as well as the bathroom. All this work may be changed or modified to suit conditions and the taste of the designer.
In Figs. 223 and 224, we've now detailed the sizes, the positions of the doors and windows, the chimneys, the closets, and the bathroom. All of this can be adjusted or altered to fit specific conditions and the designer's preferences.
Front and Side Lines.—From the floor diagram, and the door and window spaces, as marked out, we may now proceed to lay out rough front and side outlines of the building. The ceilings are to be 9 feet, and if we put a rather low-pitched roof on the square structure (Fig. 223) the front may look something like Fig. 225, and a greater pitch given to the rectangular plan (Fig. 224) will present a view as shown in Fig. 226.
Front and Side Edges.—Based on the floor plan and the marked spaces for doors and windows, we can now outline the rough front and side shapes of the building. The ceilings will be 9 feet high, and if we choose a relatively low-pitched roof for the square structure (Fig. 223), the front might resemble Fig. 225. If we give a steeper pitch to the rectangular design (Fig. 224), it will look like what is shown in Fig. 226.
[Pg 121]
[Pg 121]
The Roof.—The pitch of the roof (Fig. 225) is what is called "third pitch," and the roof (Fig. 226) has a half pitch. A "third" pitch is determined as follows:
The Roof.—The angle of the roof (Fig. 225) is known as "third pitch," and the roof (Fig. 226) has a half pitch. A "third" pitch is defined as follows:
[Pg 122] Roof Pitch.—In Fig. 227 draw a vertical line (A) and join it by a horizontal line (B). Then strike a circle (C) and step it off into three parts. The line (D), which intersects the first mark (E) and the angle of the lines (A, B), is the pitch.
[Pg 122] Roof Angle.—In Fig. 227, draw a vertical line (A) and connect it with a horizontal line (B). Then, draw a circle (C) and divide it into three equal parts. The line (D), which crosses the first mark (E) and the angle of lines (A, B), represents the pitch.
In Fig. 228 the line A is struck at 15 degrees, which is halfway between lines B and C, and it is, therefore, termed "half-pitch."
In Fig. 228, line A is set at 15 degrees, which is midway between lines B and C, so it's called "half-pitch."
Thus, we have made the ground plans, the elevations and the roofs as simple as possible. Let us proceed next with the details of the building.
Thus, we have kept the floor plans, the elevations, and the roofs as straightforward as possible. Let's move on to the details of the building.
The Foundation.—This may be of brick, stone or concrete, and its dimensions should be at least 1½ inches further out than the sill.
The Foundation.—This can be made of brick, stone, or concrete, and its dimensions should extend at least 1½ inches beyond the sill.
The Sills.—We are going to build what is called a "balloon frame"; and, first, we put down the sills, which will be a course of 2" × 6", or 2" × 8" joists, as in Fig. 229.
The Sills.—We are going to build what’s known as a "balloon frame"; and first, we’ll lay down the sills, which will be a row of 2" × 6" or 2" × 8" joists, as shown in Fig. 229.
The Flooring Joist.—The flooring joists (A) are then put down (Fig. 230). These should extend [Pg 123] clear across the house from side to side, if possible, or, if the plan is too wide, they should be lapped at the middle wall and spiked together. The ends should extend out flush with the outer margins of the sills, as shown, but in putting down the first and last sill, space must be left along the sides of the joist of sufficient width to place the studding.
The floor joist.—The flooring joists (A) are then laid down (Fig. 230). They should ideally stretch clear across the house from one side to the other, or if the design is too wide, they should overlap at the center wall and be secured together. The ends should be flush with the outer edges of the sills, as shown, but when laying down the first and last sill, there needs to be enough space left along the sides of the joist to accommodate the studding. [Pg 123]
The Studding.—The next step is to put the studding into position. 4" × 4" must be used for corners and at the sides of door and window openings. [Pg 124] 4" × 6" may be used at corners, if preferred. Consult your plan and see where the openings are for doors and windows. Measure the widths of the door and window frames, and make a measuring stick for this purpose. You must leave at least one-half inch clearance for the window or door frame, so as to give sufficient room to plumb and set the frame.
The Studding.—The next step is to position the studding. Use 4" × 4" for corners and on the sides of door and window openings. [Pg 124] 4" × 6" can be used at corners if you prefer. Check your plan to see where the doors and windows are located. Measure the widths of the door and window frames, and create a measuring stick for this. You need to leave at least half an inch of clearance for the window or door frame to ensure there's enough room to plumb and set the frame.
Setting Up.—First set up the corner posts, plumbing and bracing them. Cut a top plate for each side you are working on.
Setting Up.—First, install the corner posts, making sure they’re level and reinforced. Cut a top plate for each side you’re working on.
The Plate.—As it will be necessary in our job to use two or more lengths of 2" × 4" scantling for the plate, it will be necessary to join them together. Do this with a lap-and-butt joint (Fig. 231).
The Plate.—Since we need to use two or more lengths of 2" × 4" lumber for the plate, we'll have to connect them. Do this with a lap-and-butt joint (Fig. 231).
Then set up the 4" × 4" posts for the sides of the doors and windows, and for the partition walls.
Then install the 4" × 4" posts for the sides of the doors and windows, as well as for the partition walls.
The plate should be laid down on the sill, and marked with a pencil for every scantling to correspond with the sill markings. The plate is then put on and spiked to the 4" × 4" posts.
The plate should be placed on the sill and marked with a pencil for each stud to match the sill markings. The plate is then positioned and nailed to the 4" × 4" posts.
Intermediate Studding.—It will then be an [Pg 125] easy matter to put in the intermediate 2" × 4" studding, placing them as nearly as possible 16 inches apart to accommodate the 48-inch plastering lath.
Intermediate Studding.—It will then be an [Pg 125] easy task to install the intermediate 2" × 4" studs, spacing them as closely as possible 16 inches apart to fit the 48-inch plastering lath.
Wall Headers.—When all the studding are in you will need headers above and rails below the windows and headers above all the doors, so that you will have timbers to nail the siding to, as well as for the lathing.
Wall Headers.—Once all the studs are in place, you'll need headers above and rails below the windows, along with headers above all the doors. This provides you with timbers to nail the siding to, as well as for the lathing.
Ceiling Joists.—We are now ready for the ceiling joists, which are, usually, 2" × 6", unless there is an upper floor. These are laid 16 inches apart from center to center, preferably parallel with the floor joist.
Ceiling Beams.—We are now set to install the ceiling joists, which are typically 2" × 6", unless there is an upper floor. These should be spaced 16 inches apart from center to center, ideally running parallel to the floor joist.
It should be borne in mind that the ceiling [Pg 126] joist must always be put on with reference to the roof.
It’s important to remember that the ceiling [Pg 126] joist should always be installed in relation to the roof.
Thus, in Fig. 232, the ceiling joists (A) have their ends resting on the plate (B), so that the rafters are in line with the joists.
Thus, in Fig. 232, the ceiling joists (A) are positioned so that their ends sit on the plate (B), aligning the rafters with the joists.
Braces.—It would also be well, in putting up the studding, to use plenty of braces, although for a one-story building this is not so essential as in two-story structures, because the weather boarding serves as a system of bracing.
Braces.—It would also be a good idea, when putting up the studs, to use plenty of braces, although for a single-story building this is not as crucial as in two-story structures, since the weatherboarding acts as a bracing system.
The Rafters.—These may be made to provide for the gutter or not, as may be desired. They should be of 2" × 4" scantling.
The Rafters.—These can be designed to include the gutter or not, depending on your preference. They should be made of 2" × 4" lumber.
The Gutter.—In Fig. 233 I show a most serviceable way to provide for the gutter. A V-shaped notch is cut out of the upper side of the rafter, in which is placed the floor and a side. This [Pg 127] floor piece is raised at one end to provide an incline for the water.
The Gutter.—In Fig. 233, I've illustrated a very effective method for setting up the gutter. A V-shaped notch is cut into the upper side of the rafter, where the floor and a side are fitted. This [Pg 127] floor piece is tilted at one end to create a slope for the water.
A face-board is then applied and nailed to the ends of the rafters. This face-board is surmounted by a cap, which has an overhang, beneath which is a molding of any convenient pattern. The face-board projects down at least two inches below the angled cut of the rafter, so that when the base-board is applied, the lower margin of the face-board will project one inch below the base.
A faceboard is then attached and nailed to the ends of the rafters. This faceboard is topped with a cap that has an overhang, underneath which is a molding of any suitable design. The faceboard extends down at least two inches below the angled cut of the rafter, so that when the baseboard is installed, the lower edge of the faceboard will stick out one inch below the base.
This base-board is horizontal, as you will see. The facia-board may be of any desired width, and a corner molding should be added. It is optional to use the brackets, but if added they should be spaced apart a distance not greater than twice the height of the bracket.
This baseboard is level, as you'll notice. The fascia board can be any width you want, and a corner molding should be included. Using the brackets is optional, but if you do add them, they should be spaced no more than twice the height of the bracket apart.
A much simpler form of gutter is shown in Fig. 234, in which a V-shaped notch is also cut in the [Pg 128] rafter, and the channel is made by the pieces. The end of the rafter is cut at right angles, so the face-board is at an angle. This is also surmounted by an overhanging cap and a molding. The base is nailed to the lower edges of the rafters, and the facia is then applied.
A simpler type of gutter is shown in Fig. 234, where a V-shaped notch is also cut into the rafter, and the channel is created by the pieces. The end of the rafter is cut at a right angle, so the faceboard is angled. This is topped with an overhanging cap and a molding. The base is nailed to the lower edges of the rafters, and then the fascia is attached.
In Fig. 234a the roof has no gutter, so that the end of the rafter is cut off at an angle and a molding applied on the face-board. The base is nailed to the rafters. This is the cheapest and simplest form of structure for the roof.
In Fig. 234a, the roof doesn't have a gutter, so the end of the rafter is cut at an angle, and a molding is applied to the face-board. The base is nailed to the rafters. This is the most affordable and straightforward type of roof structure.
Setting Door and Window Frames.—The next step in order is to set the door and window frames preparatory to applying the weather boarding. It is then ready for the roof, which should be put on before the floor is laid.
Installing Door and Window Frames.—The next step is to set the door and window frames to get ready for the weather boarding. After that, it's time for the roof, which should be installed before the floor is laid.
Plastering and Inside Finish.—Next in order is the plastering, then the base-boards and the [Pg 129] casing; and, finally, the door and windows should be fitted into position.
Drywall and Interior Finishing.—Next up is the plastering, then the baseboards and the casing; and finally, the doors and windows should be installed. [Pg 129]
Enough has been said here merely to give a general outline, with some details, how to proceed with the work.
Enough has been said here simply to provide a general outline, along with some details, on how to proceed with the work.
[Pg 130]
[Pg 130]
CHAPTER XII
BRIDGES, TRUSSED WORK AND LIKE STRUCTURES
Bridges.—Bridge building is not, strictly, a part of the carpenter's education at the present day, because most structures of this kind are now built of steel; but there are certain principles involved in bridge construction which the carpenter should master.
Bridges.—Building bridges isn't really part of a carpenter's training today, since most of these structures are made from steel now; however, there are some key principles in bridge construction that every carpenter should understand.
Self-supporting Roofs.—In putting up, for instance, self-supporting roofs, or ceilings with wide spans, and steeples or towers, the bridge principle of trussed members should be understood.
Self-supporting roofs.—When constructing self-supporting roofs, ceilings with wide spans, and steeples or towers, it's important to understand the bridge principle of trussed members.
The most simple bridge or trussed form is the well-known A-shaped arch.
The simplest type of bridge or truss is the familiar A-shaped arch.
Common Trusses.—One form is shown in Fig. 235, with a vertical king post. In Fig. 236 there are two vertical supporting members, called queen posts, used in longer structures. Both of these [Pg 131] forms are equally well adapted for small bridges or for roof supports.
Common Roof Trusses.—One type is shown in Fig. 235, featuring a vertical king post. In Fig. 236, there are two vertical support members, known as queen posts, used in longer structures. Both of these [Pg 131] types are equally suitable for small bridges or roof supports.
The Vertical Upright Truss.—This form of truss naturally develops into a type of wooden bridge known all over the country, as its framing is simple, and calculations as to its capacity to sustain loads may readily be made. Figs. 237, 238 and 239 illustrate these forms.
The Vertical Upright Truss.—This type of truss naturally evolves into a kind of wooden bridge recognized nationwide because its design is straightforward, and it's easy to calculate its load-bearing capacity. Figs. 237, 238, and 239 illustrate these forms.
The Warren Girder.—Out of this simple truss grew the Warren girder, a type of bridge particularly adapted for iron and steel construction.
The Warren Truss.—From this basic truss came the Warren girder, a kind of bridge specifically designed for iron and steel construction.
This is the simplest form for metal bridge truss, or girder. It is now also largely used in steel buildings and for other work requiring strength with small weight.
This is the simplest form of metal bridge truss or girder. It's now also widely used in steel buildings and for other projects that need strength with low weight.
[Pg 132]
[Pg 132]
The Bowstring Girder.—Only one other form of [Pg 133] bridge truss need be mentioned here, and that is the bowstring shown in Fig. 240.
The Bowstring Beam.—There's just one other type of [Pg 133] bridge truss worth mentioning, and that is the bowstring shown in Fig. 240.
In this type the bow receives the entire compression thrust, and the chords act merely as suspending members.
In this type, the bow takes on the full compression force, and the chords simply function as supportive members.
Fundamental Truss Form.—In every form of truss, whether for building or for bridge work, the principles of the famous A-truss must be employed in some form or other; and the boy who is experimentally inclined will readily evolve means to determine what degree of strength the upper and the lower members must have for a given length of truss to sustain a specified weight.
Basic Truss Design.—In every type of truss, whether for construction or bridges, the principles of the well-known A-truss must be used in some way; and a curious young person will easily find ways to figure out how strong the upper and lower parts need to be for a certain length of truss to support a specific weight.
There are rules for all these problems, some of them very intricate, but all of them intensely interesting. It will be a valuable addition to your knowledge to give this subject earnest study.
There are rules for all these issues, some of them quite complex, but all of them really fascinating. Taking the time to study this topic deeply will be a valuable addition to your knowledge.
[Pg 134]
[Pg 134]
CHAPTER XIII
THE BEST WOODS FOR THE BEGINNER
In this place consideration will be given to some of the features relating to the materials to be employed, particularly with reference to the manner in which they can be worked to the best advantage, rather than to their uses.
In this section, we'll discuss some of the features related to the materials to be used, especially regarding how they can be utilized most effectively, rather than their applications.
The Best Woods.—The prime wood, and the one with which most boys are familiar, is white pine. It has an even texture throughout, is generally straight grained, and is soft and easily worked. White pine is a wood requiring a very sharp tool. It is, therefore, the best material for the beginner, as it will at the outset teach him the important lesson of keeping the tools in a good, sharp condition.
The Best Woodlands.—The top wood that most kids know is white pine. It has a smooth texture, usually has a straight grain, and is soft and easy to work with. White pine needs a really sharp tool. Because of this, it’s the ideal material for beginners, as it will teach them the crucial lesson of keeping their tools sharp and in good shape right from the start.
Soft Woods.—It is also well for the novice to do his initial work with a soft wood, because in joining the parts together inaccuracies may be easily corrected. If, for instance, in mortising and tenoning, the edge of the mortised member is not true, or, rather, is not "square," the shoulder of the tenon on one side will abut before the other side does, and thus leave a crack, if the wood is hard. If the wood is soft there is always enough yield to [Pg 135] enable the workman to spring it together. Therefore, until you have learned how to make a true joint, use soft wood.
Softwoods.—It's also a good idea for beginners to start with a soft wood because any mistakes in joining the pieces can be easily fixed. For example, if the edge of the mortised piece isn't perfectly straight or "square," one side of the tenon's shoulder will touch before the other side, which can create a gap if the wood is hard. With soft wood, there's typically enough flexibility to push the pieces together. So, until you’ve mastered making a precise joint, stick with soft wood.
Poplar is another good wood for the beginner, as well as redwood, a western product.
Poplar is another great wood for beginners, along with redwood, which is a product from the West.
Hard Woods.—Of the hard woods, cherry is the most desirable for the carpenter's tool. For working purposes it has all the advantages of a soft wood, and none of its disadvantages. It is not apt to warp, like poplar or birch, and its shrinking unit is less than that of any other wood, excepting redwood. There is practically no shrinkage in redwood.
Hardwoods.—Among the hard woods, cherry is the top choice for carpenters' tools. For practical use, it has all the benefits of soft wood without any of the drawbacks. It doesn't tend to warp like poplar or birch, and its shrinkage rate is lower than that of any other wood, except for redwood. In fact, redwood has almost no shrinkage at all.
The Most Difficult Woods.—Ash is by far the most difficult wood to work. While not as hard as oak, it has the disadvantage that the entire board is seamed with growth ribs which are extremely hard, while the intervening layers between these ribs are soft, and have open pores, so that, for instance, in making a mortise, the chisel is liable to follow the hard ribs, if the grain runs at an angle to the course of the mortise.
The Toughest Woods.—Ash is definitely the hardest wood to work with. Although it’s not as hard as oak, it has the downside that the whole board is lined with growth rings that are really tough, while the layers in between these rings are softer and have open pores. So, for example, when making a mortise, the chisel is likely to follow the hard rings if the grain runs at an angle to the direction of the mortise.
The Hard-ribbed Grain in Wood.—This peculiarity of the grain in ash makes it a beautiful wood when finished. Of the light-colored woods, oak only excels it, because in this latter wood each year's growth shows a wider band, and the interstices between the ribs have stronger contrasting [Pg 136] colors than ash; so that in filling the surface, before finishing it, the grain of the wood is brought out with most effective clearness and with a beautifully blended contrast.
The Hard-Ribbed Grain in Wood.—This unique grain in ash makes it a stunning wood when finished. Among light-colored woods, only oak surpasses it, as each year's growth in oak displays a wider band, and the spaces between the ribs have more pronounced contrasting colors than in ash. Therefore, when filling the surface before finishing, the wood's grain is highlighted with incredible clarity and a beautifully blended contrast. [Pg 136]
The Easiest Working Woods.—The same thing may be said, relatively, concerning cherry and walnut. While cherry has a beautiful finishing surface, the blending contrasts of colors are not so effective as in walnut.
The Easiest Woods to Work.—The same can be said, relatively, about cherry and walnut. While cherry has a beautiful finish, the contrasting colors don't stand out as much as they do in walnut.
Oregon pine is extremely hard to work, owing to the same difficulties experienced in handling ash; but the finished Oregon pine surface makes it a most desirable material for certain articles of furniture.
Oregon pine is very hard to work with, due to the same challenges faced when handling ash; however, the finished surface of Oregon pine makes it a highly desirable material for certain types of furniture.
Do not attempt to employ this nor ash until you have mastered the trade. Confine yourself to pine, poplar, cherry and walnut. These woods are all easily obtainable everywhere, and from them you can make a most creditable variety of useful articles.
Do not try to use this or ash until you have mastered the craft. Stick to pine, poplar, cherry, and walnut. These woods are readily available everywhere, and you can create a great range of useful items from them.
Sugar and maple are two hard woods which may be added to the list. Sugar, particularly, is a good-working wood, but maple is more difficult. Spruce, on the other hand, is the strongest and toughest wood, considering its weight, which is but a little more than that of pine.
Sugar and maple are two hardwoods that can be included in the list. Sugar, in particular, is easy to work with, but maple is tougher to handle. Spruce, on the other hand, is the strongest and most durable wood, especially given its weight, which is just slightly heavier than that of pine.
Differences in the Working of Woods.—Different woods are not worked with equal facility by [Pg 137] all the tools. Oak is an easy wood to handle with a saw, but is, probably, aside from ash, the most difficult wood known to plane.
Differences in How Woods Function.—Different woods are not worked with the same ease by all tools. Oak is easy to cut with a saw, but is, probably, aside from ash, the hardest wood to plane. [Pg 137]
Ash is hard for the saw or the plane. On the other hand, there is no wood so easy to manipulate with the saw or plane as cherry. Pine is easily worked with a plane, but difficult to saw; not on account of hardness, but because it is so soft that the saw is liable to tear it.
Ash is tough for the saw or the plane. On the other hand, no wood is easier to work with using a saw or plane than cherry. Pine can be easily planed, but it’s hard to saw; not because it’s hard, but because it’s so soft that the saw is likely to tear it.
Forcing Saws in Wood.—One of the reasons why the forcing of saws is such a bad practice will be observed in cutting white or yellow pine. For cross-cutting, the saw should have fine teeth, not heavily set, and evenly filed. To do a good job of cross-cutting, the saw must be held at a greater angle, or should lay down flatter than in ripping, as by so doing the lower side of the board will not break away as much as if the saw should be held more nearly vertical.
Using Saws on Wood.—One of the reasons why forcing saws is such a poor practice can be seen when cutting white or yellow pine. For cross-cutting, the saw should have fine teeth, not heavily set, and evenly sharpened. To do a good job of cross-cutting, the saw must be held at a greater angle or laid down flatter than when ripping, as this will prevent the lower side of the board from breaking away as much as if the saw were held more vertically.
These general observations are made in the hope that they will serve as a guide to enable you to select your lumber with some degree of intelligence before you commence work.
These general observations are made in the hope that they will help you choose your lumber wisely before you start working.
[Pg 138]
[Pg 138]
CHAPTER XIV
WOOD TURNING
Advantages of Wood Turning.—This is not, strictly, in the carpenter's domain; but a knowledge of its use will be of great service in the trade, and particularly in cabinet making. I urge the ingenious youth to rig up a wood-turning lathe, for the reason that it is a tool easily made and one which may be readily turned by foot, if other power is not available.
Benefits of Wood Turning.—This isn’t strictly part of a carpenter’s work; however, knowing how to use it will be very beneficial in the trade, especially in cabinet making. I encourage creative young people to set up a wood-turning lathe, as it’s a tool that can be easily constructed and can be operated by foot if there's no other power source available.
Simple Turning Lathe.—A very simple turning lathe may be made by following these instructions:
Basic Lathe.—You can create a very basic turning lathe by following these instructions:
The Rails.—Procure two straight 2" × 4" scantling (A), four feet long, and planed on all sides. Bore four ⅜-inch holes at each end, as shown, and 10 inches from one end four more holes. A plan of these holes is shown in B, where the exact spacing is indicated. Then prepare two pieces 2" × 4" scantling (C), planed, 42 inches long, one end of each being chamfered off, as at 2, and provided with four bolt holes. Ten inches down, and on the same side, with the chamfer (2) is a cross gain (3), the same angle as the chamfer. Midway between the cross gain (3) and the lower end of the leg is [Pg 139] a gain (4) in the edge, at right angles to the cross gain (3).
The Rails.—Get two straight 2" × 4" boards (A), each four feet long, and make sure they’re smooth on all sides. Drill four ⅜-inch holes at each end, and four more holes 10 inches from one end, as shown. A diagram of these holes is in B, where you can see the exact spacing. Next, prepare two pieces of 2" × 4" wood (C), also smooth, that are 42 inches long, with one end of each cut at an angle, like at 2, and fitted with four bolt holes. Ten inches down from the chamfered end (2) on the same side, make a cross gain (3) at the same angle as the chamfer. In the middle between the cross gain (3) and the bottom end of the leg, cut a gain (4) in the edge that is perpendicular to the cross gain (3). [Pg 139]
The Legs.—Now prepare two legs (D) for the tail end of the frame, each 32 inches long, with a chamfer (5) at one end, and provided with four bolt holes. At the lower end bore a bolt hole for the cross base piece. This piece (E) is 4" × 4", 21 inches long, and has a bolt hole at each end and one near the middle. The next piece (F) is 2" × 4", 14½ inches long, provided with a rebate (6) at each end, to fit the cross gains (4) of the legs (C). Near the middle is a journal block (7).
The Legs.—Now prepare two legs (D) for the back of the frame, each 32 inches long, with a bevel (5) at one end, and made with four bolt holes. At the bottom end, drill a bolt hole for the cross base piece. This piece (E) measures 4" × 4", is 21 inches long, and has a bolt hole at each end and one in the middle. The next piece (F) is 2" × 4", 14½ inches long, with a notch (6) at each end to fit the cross cuts (4) of the legs (C). Near the middle is a journal block (7).
Centering Blocks.—Next provide a 4" × 4" piece (G), 40 inches long, through which bore a ¾-inch hole (8), 2 inches from the upper end, and [Pg 140] four bolt holes at right angles to the shaft hole (8). Then, with a saw split down this bearing, as shown at 9, to a point 4 inches from the end. Ten inches below the upper end prepare two cross gains (10), each an inch deep and four inches wide. In these gains are placed the top rails (A), so the bolt holes in the gains (10) will coincide with the bolt holes (11) in the piece A. Below the gains (10) this post has a journal block (12), intended to be in line with the journal block (7) of the piece F.
Centering Blocks.—Next, take a 4" × 4" piece (G) that is 40 inches long and drill a ¾-inch hole (8) 2 inches from the top end. Then, create four bolt holes at right angles to the shaft hole (8). After that, use a saw to split down this bearing as shown at 9, stopping 4 inches from the end. Ten inches below the top end, make two cross gains (10), each 1 inch deep and 4 inches wide. Place the top rails (A) into these gains so that the bolt holes in the gains (10) align with the bolt holes (11) in piece A. Below the gains (10), this post has a journal block (12) that should be aligned with the journal block (7) of piece F.
Then make a block (H) 2" × 4", and 6 inches long. This also must have a shaft hole (B), and a saw kerf (14), similar to the arrangement on the upper end of the post (G); also bore four bolt holes, as shown. This block rests between the upper ends of the lugs (C).
Then create a block (H) that measures 2" × 4" and is 6 inches long. This also needs to have a shaft hole (B) and a saw kerf (14), just like the setup at the top of the post (G); additionally, drill four bolt holes as shown. This block sits between the upper ends of the lugs (C).
Another block (I), 2" × 4", and 6 feet long, with four bolt holes, will be required for the tail end of the frame, to keep the rails (A) two inches apart at that end.
Another block (I), 2" × 4", and 6 feet long, with four bolt holes, will be needed for the back end of the frame, to keep the rails (A) two inches apart at that end.
The Tail Stock.—This part of the structure is made of the following described material:
The Tailstock.—This part of the structure is made of the material described below:
[Pg 141] Procure a scantling (J), planed, 4" × 4", 24 inches long, the upper end of which is to be provided with four bolt holes, and a centering hole (15). At the lower end of the piece is a slot (16) 8 inches long and 1½ inches wide, and there are also two bolt holes bored transversely through the piece to receive bolts for reinforcing the end.
[Pg 141] Get a piece of lumber (J), planed, measuring 4" × 4" and 24 inches long. The top end should have four bolt holes and a center hole (15). The bottom end should have a slot (16) that is 8 inches long and 1½ inches wide. Additionally, there should be two bolt holes drilled across the piece to hold bolts for strengthening the end.
A pair of cheekpieces (K), 2" × 4", and each 12 inches long, are mitered at the ends, and each has four bolt holes by means of which the ends may be bolted to the upright (J).
A pair of cheekpieces (K), 2" × 4", and each 12 inches long, are angled at the ends, and each has four bolt holes that allow the ends to be bolted to the upright (J).
Then a step wedge (L) is made of 1⅜" × 2" material, 10 inches long. This has at least four steps (17), each step being 2 inches long. A wedge 1⅜ inches thick, 10 inches long, and tapering from 2 inches to 1⅜ inches, completes the tail-stock.
Then a step wedge (L) is made of 1⅜" × 2" material, 10 inches long. This has at least four steps (17), each step being 2 inches long. A wedge that is 1⅜ inches thick, 10 inches long, and tapers from 2 inches to 1⅜ inches completes the tail-stock.
The Tool Rest.—This is the most difficult part of the whole lathe, as it must be rigid, and so constructed that it has a revolvable motion as well as being capable of a movement to and from the material in the lathe.
The Tool Rest.—This is the hardest part of the entire lathe because it needs to be sturdy and designed to allow for rotation, as well as movement toward and away from the material in the lathe.
Select a good 4" × 4" scantling (M), 14 inches long, as shown in Fig. 243. Two inches from one end cut a cross gain (I), 1½ inches deep and 1 inch wide, and round off the upper edge, as at 2.
Select a good 4" × 4" piece of lumber (M), 14 inches long, as shown in Fig. 243. Two inches from one end, cut a cross gain (I), 1½ inches deep and 1 inch wide, and round off the upper edge, as at 2.
Then prepare a piece (N), 1 inch thick, 8 inches wide, and 10 inches long. Round off the upper edge to form a nose, and midway between its ends [Pg 142] cut a cross gain 4 inches wide and 1½ inches deep. The lower margin may be cut away, at an angle on each side of the gain. All that is necessary now is to make a block (O), 8 inches long, rounded on one edge, and a wedge (P).
Then prepare a piece (N), 1 inch thick, 8 inches wide, and 10 inches long. Round off the top edge to create a nose, and halfway between its ends [Pg 142] cut a cross gain 4 inches wide and 1½ inches deep. The lower edge can be trimmed at an angle on each side of the gain. All that's left to do is make a block (O), 8 inches long, rounded on one edge, and a wedge (P).
A leather belt or strap (Q), 1½ inches wide, formed into a loop, as shown in the perspective view (R), serves as a means for holding the rest rigidly when the wedge is driven in.
A leather belt or strap (Q), 1½ inches wide, formed into a loop, as shown in the perspective view (R), acts as a way to keep the rest steady when the wedge is inserted.
The Tool Rest.—This is the most difficult part of the whole lathe, as it must be rigid, and so constructed that it has a revolvable motion as well as being capable of a movement to and from the material in the lathe.
The Tool Rest.—This is the most challenging part of the entire lathe, as it needs to be sturdy and designed to allow for rotation, as well as capable of moving toward and away from the material being worked on in the lathe.
Materials.—Then procure the following bolts:
Materials.—Then get the following bolts:
4⅜" | bolts, | 10" | long. |
8⅜" | bolts, | 6" | long. |
20⅜" | bolts, | 5" | long. |
5⅜" | bolts, | 9" | long. |
The Mandrel.—A piece of steel tubing (S), No. 10 gage, ¾ inch in diameter, 11½ inches long, will be required for the mandrel. Get a blacksmith, if a machine shop is not convenient, to put a fixed center (1) in one end, and a removable centering member (2) in the other end.
The Mandrel.—You'll need a piece of steel tubing (S), No. 10 gauge, ¾ inch in diameter, and 11½ inches long for the mandrel. If a machine shop isn't nearby, ask a blacksmith to install a fixed center (1) at one end and a removable centering piece (2) at the other end.
[Pg 143] On this mandrel place a collar (3), held by a set screw, and alongside of it a pair of pulleys, each 1½ inches wide, one of them, being, say, 2 inches in diameter, and the other 3 inches. This mandrel is held in position by means of the posts of the frame which carry the split journal bearings. This form of bearing will make a durable lathe, free from chattering, as the bolts can be used for tightening the mandrel whenever they wear.
[Pg 143] On this mandrel, add a collar (3) secured with a set screw, and next to it a pair of pulleys, each 1½ inches wide, one being about 2 inches in diameter and the other 3 inches. This mandrel is kept in place by the posts of the frame that support the split journal bearings. This type of bearing will create a lasting lathe that is free from vibrations since the bolts can be tightened to secure the mandrel whenever they become loose.
The center point (1) is designed to rest against a metal plate (4) bolted to the wooden post, as shown in the large drawing.
The center point (1) is meant to sit against a metal plate (4) attached to the wooden post, as shown in the large drawing.
Fly-wheel.—It now remains only to provide a fly-wheel and treadle with the communicating belt. The fly-wheel may be of any convenient size, or it may be some discarded pulley or wheel. Suppose it is two feet in diameter; then, as your small pulley is 2 inches in diameter, each revolution of the large wheel makes twelve revolutions in the mandrel, and you can readily turn the wheel eighty [Pg 144] times a minute. In that case your mandrel will revolve 960 revolutions per minute, which is ample speed for your purposes.
Flywheel.—All that's left is to add a fly-wheel and treadle with the connecting belt. The fly-wheel can be any convenient size, or even an old pulley or wheel. Let's say it's two feet in diameter; since your small pulley is 2 inches in diameter, each turn of the large wheel will make twelve turns of the mandrel, and you can easily spin the wheel eighty times a minute. That means your mandrel will rotate 960 times per minute, which is more than enough speed for what you need. [Pg 144]
The wheel should be mounted on a piece of ¾-inch steel tubing, one end having a crank 3 inches long. This crank is connected up by a pitman rod, with the triangularly shaped treadle frame.
The wheel should be attached to a piece of ¾-inch steel tubing, with one end having a crank that's 3 inches long. This crank is connected by a pitman rod to the triangular treadle frame.
Such a lathe is easily made, as it requires but little metal or machine work, and it is here described because it will be a pleasure for a boy to make such a useful tool. What he needs is the proper plan and the right dimensions to carry out the work, and his own ingenuity will make the modifications suitable to his purpose.
Such a lathe is easy to make, as it needs very little metal or machine work. It's described here because it will be enjoyable for a boy to create such a useful tool. What he needs is the right plan and the correct dimensions to complete the project, and his own creativity will help him make the necessary adjustments to fit his needs.
The illustration (Fig. 245) shows such a lathe assembled ready for work.
The illustration (Fig. 245) shows a lathe set up and ready to work.
The Tools Required.—A few simple tools will complete an outfit capable of doing a great variety of work. The illustration (Fig. 246) shows five chisels, of which all other chisels are modifications.
The Required Tools.—A few basic tools will create a setup that can handle a wide range of tasks. The illustration (Fig. 246) shows five chisels, which are variations of all other chisels.
A and B are both oblique firmer chisels, A being ground with a bevel on one side only, and B with a bevel on each side.
A and B are both angled firmer chisels, with A having a bevel ground on just one side and B having a bevel on both sides.
C is a broad gage, with a hollow blade, and a curved cutting edge, ground with a taper on the rounded side only.
C is a wide gauge with a hollow blade and a curved cutting edge, tapered on the rounded side only.
D is a narrow gage similarly ground, and E is a V-shaped gage.
D is a narrow gauge ground in a similar way, and E is a V-shaped gauge.
[Pg 145]
[Pg 145]
[Pg 146]
[Pg 146]
It may be observed that in wood-turning sharp tools are absolutely necessary, hence a good oil stone, or several small, round and V-shaped stones should be used.
It’s clear that in wood-turning, sharp tools are essential, so using a good oil stone or several small, round, and V-shaped stones is important.
[Pg 147]
[Pg 147]
CHAPTER XV
ON THE USE OF STAINS
As this subject properly belongs to the painter and decorator, it is not necessary to go into details concerning the methods used to finish off your work. As you may not be able to afford the luxury of having your productions painted or stained, enough information will be given to enable you, if the character of the wood justifies it, to do the work yourself to a limited extent.
As this topic is mainly for the painter and decorator, there’s no need to dive into the specifics of how to finish your work. Since you might not be able to afford having your pieces painted or stained, I’ll provide enough information so that you can handle the work yourself to some degree, if the type of wood makes it worth it.
Soft Wood.—As, presumably, most of your first work will be done with pine, poplar, or other light-colored material, and, as many people prefer the furniture to be dark in color, you should be prepared to accommodate them.
Softwood.—Since most of your initial work will likely be with pine, poplar, or other light-colored materials, and since many people prefer their furniture to be dark, you should be ready to meet that preference.
Use of Stains.—Our subject has nothing to do with the technique of staining, but has reference, solely, to the use of stains. I recommend, therefore, that, since all kinds of stains are now kept in stock, and for sale everywhere, you would better rely upon the manufactured goods rather than to endeavor to mix up the paints yourself.
Use of Stains.—Our topic isn’t about the technique of staining, but rather the use of stains. I suggest that, since there are all kinds of stains readily available and for sale everywhere, you should stick to the manufactured products instead of trying to mix the paints yourself.
Stains as Imitations.—It will be well to remember one thing as to stains. Never attempt to stain anything unless that stain is intended to [Pg 148] produce an imitation of some real wood. There are stains made up which, when applied, do not imitate any known wood. This is bad taste and should be avoided. Again you should know that the same stain tint will not produce like effects on the different light-colored woods. Try the cherry stain on pieces of pine, poplar, and birch, and you will readily see that while pine gives a brilliant red, comparatively speaking, pine or birch will be much darker, and the effect on poplar will be that of a muddy color. In fact, poplar does not stain cherry to good advantage; and for birch the ordinary stain should have a small addition of vermilion.
Imitation Stains.—It's important to keep one thing in mind about stains. Never try to stain anything unless that stain is meant to imitate some real wood. There are stains available that, when applied, don’t resemble any known type of wood. This is poor taste and should be avoided. Additionally, you should understand that the same stain color will not create similar results on different light-colored woods. Test the cherry stain on pieces of pine, poplar, and birch, and you will quickly see that while pine gives a bright red, birch will be much darker, and the effect on poplar will be a muddy color. In fact, poplar does not take cherry stain well; for birch, the regular stain should have a little vermilion mixed in.
By making trials of your stains before applying them to the furniture, you will readily see the value of this suggestion.
By testing your stains on a small area before applying them to the furniture, you will quickly understand the benefit of this suggestion.
Good Taste in Staining.—Oak, mahogany, cherry, black walnut, and like imitations are always good in an artistic sense, but imitations of unfamiliar woods mean nothing to the average person. The too common mistake is to try to imitate oak by staining pine or poplar or birch. It may, with good effect, be stained to imitate cherry.
Good Taste in Stains.—Oak, mahogany, cherry, black walnut, and similar woods are always an artistic choice, but imitations of unfamiliar woods don’t mean much to the average person. A common mistake is trying to make pine, poplar, or birch look like oak through staining. However, it can effectively be stained to resemble cherry.
Oregon pine, or some light-colored wood, with a strong contrasting grain may be used for staining in imitation of oak.
Oregon pine, or another light-colored wood with a strong contrasting grain, can be used for staining to look like oak.
Great Contrasts Bad.—Violent contrasts in furniture [Pg 149] staining have the effect of cheapness, unless the contrasting outlines are artistically distributed throughout the article, from base to top finish.
Great Contrasts Sucks.—Harsh contrasts in furniture [Pg 149] staining give off a cheap vibe, unless the contrasting shapes are stylishly arranged throughout the piece, from base to top finish.
Staining Contrasting Woods.—Then, again, do not stain a piece of furniture so that one part represents a cheap, soft wood, and the other part a dark or costly wood. Imagine, for instance, a cabinet with the stiles, rails and mullions of mahogany, and the panels of pine or poplar, or the reverse, and you can understand how incongruous would be the result produced.
Staining Different Woods.—Also, don’t stain a piece of furniture in a way that makes one part look like a cheap, soft wood and another part look like a dark or expensive wood. For example, picture a cabinet with the frame and dividers made of mahogany, and the panels made of pine or poplar, or the other way around, and you can see how mismatched the end result would be.
On the other hand, it would not be a very artistic job to make the panels of cherry and the mullions and stiles of mahogany, because the two woods do not harmonize, although frequently wrongly combined.
On the other hand, it wouldn’t be a very artistic choice to use cherry for the panels and mahogany for the mullions and stiles, because the two woods don’t match well, even though they are often incorrectly paired together.
Hard Wood Imitations.—It would be better to use, for instance, ash or oak for one portion of the work, and a dark wood, like cherry or walnut, for the other part; but usually a cherry cabinet should be made of cherry throughout; while a curly maple chiffonier could not be improved by having the legs of some other material.
Wood Alternatives.—It's better to use, for example, ash or oak for one part of the project, and a dark wood, like cherry or walnut, for another part; however, a cherry cabinet should generally be made entirely of cherry. Likewise, a curly maple chiffonier wouldn't look better if the legs were made from a different material.
These considerations should determine for you whether or not you can safely use stains to represent different woods in the same article.
These factors should help you decide if you can safely use stains to mimic different types of wood in the same piece.
Natural Effects.—If effects are wanted, the skilled workman will properly rely upon the natural [Pg 150] grain of the wood; hence, in staining, you should try to imitate nature, because in staining you will depend for contrast on the natural grain of the wood to help you out in producing pleasing effects.
Natural Effects.—If you want good results, a skilled worker will trust the natural [Pg 150] grain of the wood. Therefore, when staining, you should aim to replicate nature, as you will rely on the wood's natural grain to create attractive effects.
Natural Wood Stains.—It should be said, in general, however, that a stain is, at best, a poor makeshift. There is nothing so pleasing as the natural wood. It always has an appearance of cleanliness and openness. To stain the wood shows an attempt to cover up cheapness by a cheap contrivance. The exception to this rule is mahogany, which is generally enriched by the application of a ruby tint which serves principally to emphasize the beautiful markings of the wood.
Natural Wood Stains.—Generally speaking, a stain is, at best, a poor substitute. Nothing looks as good as natural wood. It always has a clean and open look. Staining the wood seems like an attempt to hide its cheapness with an inexpensive fix. The exception to this is mahogany, which is usually enhanced with a ruby tint that mainly highlights the wood's beautiful grain.
Polishing Stained Surfaces.—If, on the other hand, you wish to go to the labor of polishing the furniture to a high degree, staining becomes an art, and will add to the beauty and durability of any soft or cheap wood, excepting poplar.
Cleaning Stained Surfaces.—If, on the other hand, you want to put the effort into polishing the furniture to a high shine, staining turns into an art and will enhance the beauty and durability of any soft or inexpensive wood, except for poplar.
When the article is highly polished, so a good, smooth surface is provided, staining does not cheapen, but, on the other hand, serves to embellish the article.
When the article is well-polished and has a nice, smooth surface, staining doesn't detract from it; instead, it adds to the article's beauty.
As a rule, therefore, it is well to inculcate this lesson: Do not stain unless you polish; otherwise, it is far better to preserve the natural color of the wood. One of the most beautiful sideboards I ever [Pg 151] saw was made of Oregon pine, and the natural wood, well filled and highly polished. That finish gave it an effect which enhanced its value to a price which equaled any cherry or mahogany product.
As a rule, it’s important to remember this lesson: Don’t stain the wood unless you’re going to polish it; otherwise, it’s much better to keep the natural color of the wood. One of the most beautiful sideboards I’ve ever seen was made of Oregon pine, and the natural wood was well filled and highly polished. That finish gave it an effect that increased its value to a price that rivaled any cherry or mahogany piece. [Pg 151]
[Pg 152]
[Pg 152]
CHAPTER XVI
THE CARPENTER AND THE ARCHITECT
A carpenter has a trade; the architect a profession. It is not to be assumed that one vocation is more honorable than the other. A profession is defined as a calling, or occupation, "if not mechanical, agricultural, or the like," to which one devotes himself and his energies. A trade is defined as an occupation "which a person has learned and engages in, especially mechanical employment, as distinguished from the liberal arts," or the learned professions.
A carpenter has a trade; the architect has a profession. It's not fair to assume that one occupation is more honorable than the other. A profession is defined as a calling or occupation, "if not mechanical, agricultural, or the like," that someone dedicates themselves and their energy to. A trade is defined as an occupation "that a person has learned and practices, especially mechanical work, as opposed to the liberal arts," or the learned professions.
Opportunity is the great boon in life. To the ambitious young man the carpenter's trade offers a field for venturing into the learned professions by a route which cannot be equaled in any other pursuit. In his work he daily enters into contact with problems which require mathematics of the highest order, geometry, the methods of calculating strains and stresses, as well as laying out angles and curves.
Opportunity is the greatest blessing in life. For the ambitious young man, the carpenter's trade provides a pathway to enter learned professions that can't be matched by any other career. In his work, he regularly deals with problems that require advanced mathematics, geometry, and the calculation of strains and stresses, as well as designing angles and curves.
This is a trade wherein he must keep in mind many calculations as to materials, number, size, and methods of joining; he must remember all the [Pg 153] small details which go to make up the entire structure. This exercise necessitates a mental picture of the finished product. His imagination is thus directed to concrete objects. As the mind develops, it becomes creative in its character, and the foundation is laid for a higher sphere of usefulness in what is called the professional field.
This is a trade where he has to consider many calculations regarding materials, quantity, size, and ways to join them; he must keep in mind all the small details that make up the whole structure. This process requires a mental image of the finished product. His imagination is focused on tangible objects. As the mind grows, it becomes more creative, laying the groundwork for a greater level of usefulness in what is known as the professional world. [Pg 153]
A good carpenter naturally develops into an architect, and the best architect is he who knows the trade. It is a profession which requires not only the artistic taste, but a technical knowledge of details, of how practically to carry out the work, how to superintend construction, and what the different methods are for doing things.
A good carpenter naturally becomes an architect, and the best architect is the one who understands the trade. This profession requires not just artistic taste, but also technical knowledge of the details, how to practically execute the work, how to oversee construction, and what the different methods are for getting things done.
The architect must have a scientific education, which gives him a knowledge of the strength of materials, and of structural forms; of the durability of materials; of the price, quality, and use of everything which goes into a structure; of labor conditions; and of the laws pertaining to buildings.
The architect needs a scientific education, which provides an understanding of the strength of materials and structural forms; the durability of materials; the cost, quality, and use of everything that goes into a building; labor conditions; and the laws related to construction.
Many of these questions will naturally present themselves to the carpenter. They are in the sphere of his employment, but it depends upon himself to make the proper use of the material thus daily brought to him.
Many of these questions will naturally come up for the carpenter. They relate to his job, but it's up to him to make good use of the materials he receives every day.
It is with a view to instil that desire and ambition in every young man, to make the brain do [Pg 154] what the hand has heretofore done, that I suggest this course. The learned profession is yours if you deserve it, and you can deserve it only through study, application, and perseverance.
It’s to encourage that desire and ambition in every young man, to make the mind achieve what the hand has done before, that I recommend this path. The professional field is yours if you earn it, and you can only earn it through studying, hard work, and persistence. [Pg 154]
Do well that which you attempt to do. Don't do it in that manner because some one has done it in that way before you. If, in the trade, the experience of ages has taught the craftsman that some particular way of doing things is correct, there is no law to prevent you from combating that method. Your way may be better. But you must remember that in every plan for doing a thing there is some particular reason, or reasons, why it is carried out in that way. Study and learn to apply those reasons.
Do your best at whatever you try to do. Don’t do it just because someone else has done it that way before you. If, over time, experienced workers have established a certain method as the standard, there’s nothing stopping you from challenging that approach. Your method might be better. But keep in mind that there are specific reasons, or reasons why, things are done a certain way. Study those reasons and learn to apply them.
So in your leisure or in your active moments, if you wish to advance, you must be alert. Know for yourself the reasons for things, and you will thereby form the stepping stones that will lead you upward and contribute to your success.
So whether you're relaxing or busy, if you want to get ahead, you need to stay aware. Understand the reasons behind things, and you’ll create the stepping stones that will help you rise and contribute to your success.
[Pg 155]
[Pg 155]
CHAPTER XVII
USEFUL ARTICLES TO MAKE
As stated in the Introductory, the purpose of this book is to show how to do the things, and not to draw a picture in order to write a description of it. Merely in the line of suggestion, we give in this chapter views and brief descriptions of useful household articles, all of which may be made by the boy who has carefully studied the preceding pages.
As mentioned in the Introductory, the goal of this book is to show how to do things, not just to create an image and write a description about it. In this chapter, we provide suggestions, views, and brief descriptions of useful household items, all of which can be made by someone who has studied the previous pages carefully.
This figure shows a common bench wholly made of material 1 inch thick, the top being 12 inches wide and 4 feet long. The legs are 14 inches high and 13 inches wide; and the side supporting rails [Pg 156] are 3 inches wide. These proportions may, of course, be varied. You will note that the sides of the top or seat have an overhang of ½ inch on each margin.
This figure shows a standard bench made entirely of material that's 1 inch thick, with a top that's 12 inches wide and 4 feet long. The legs are 14 inches high and 13 inches wide, and the side supporting rails are 3 inches wide. These proportions can, of course, be adjusted. You'll notice that the sides of the top or seat extend ½ inch on each edge. [Pg 156]
This is a common, square-top stool, the seat being 12" × 12", and the legs 14 inches high. Two of the pieces forming the legs are 10 inches wide and the other two 8 inches wide, so that when the [Pg 157] wide pieces are nailed to the edges of the narrow pieces the leg body will be 10" × 10" and thus give the seat an overhang of 1 inch around the margins.
This is a standard square stool with a seat measuring 12" × 12" and legs that are 14 inches tall. Two of the leg pieces are 10 inches wide, while the other two are 8 inches wide. When the wide pieces are nailed to the edges of the narrow pieces, the leg structure will measure 10" × 10", creating a 1-inch overhang of the seat around the edges. [Pg 157]
A most useful article is shown in Fig. 249. It is a blacking-box with a lid, a folding shoe rest and three compartments. The detached figure shows a vertical cross-section of the body of the box, and illustrates how the shoe rest is hinged to the sides of the box. The box itself is 14" × 16" in dimensions; the sides are 6 inches wide and the legs 5 inches in height. In order to give strength to the legs, the bottom has its corners cut out, to [Pg 158] permit the upper ends of the legs to rest in the recesses thus formed.
A very practical item is shown in Fig. 249. It's a blacking box with a lid, a folding shoe rest, and three compartments. The detached figure displays a vertical cross-section of the box's body and shows how the shoe rest is attached to the sides of the box. The box itself measures 14" × 16"; the sides are 6 inches wide and the legs are 5 inches tall. To make the legs sturdier, the bottom has its corners cut out, allowing the upper ends of the legs to rest in the recesses created. [Pg 158]
This is a convenient form of easel, made of four uprights. The main front uprights are of strips 5/8" × 1¼", and the rear uprights are of ½" × 1" material. A thin broomstick will serve as the pivot bar for the upper end. The rest is made of two strips, each ½" × 1", nailed together to form an L, and nails or wooden pins will serve to hold the rest in any desired position. The front uprights should be at least 5 feet long.
This is a handy type of easel made from four vertical posts. The front vertical posts are made from 5/8" × 1¼" strips, while the back posts are made from ½" × 1" materials. A thin broomstick can be used as the pivot bar for the top. The rest consists of two strips, each measuring ½" × 1", nailed together to create an L shape, and nails or wooden pegs will hold everything in the desired position. The front vertical posts should be at least 5 feet tall.
A simple hanging book-rack is illustrated in [Pg 159] Fig. 251. The two vertical strips are each 4 inches wide, 1 inch thick and 4 feet long. Four shelves are provided, each ¾ inch thick, 9 inches wide and 4 feet long. Each shelf is secured to the uprights by hinges on the upper side, so as to permit it to be swung upwardly, or folded; and below each hinge is a triangular block or bracket, fixed to the shelf, to support it in a horizontal position.
A simple hanging book rack is shown in [Pg 159] Fig. 251. The two vertical strips are each 4 inches wide, 1 inch thick, and 4 feet long. There are four shelves, each ¾ inch thick, 9 inches wide, and 4 feet long. Each shelf is attached to the uprights with hinges on the top side, allowing it to swing upward or fold down. Beneath each hinge, there's a triangular block or bracket that is fixed to the shelf to keep it in a horizontal position.
A sad-iron holder, or bookcase, shown in Fig. 252, is another simple form of structure. It may be sufficiently large to serve as a standing case by having the uprights at the ends serve as legs, or the uprights may have holes at their upper [Pg 160] ends, by means of which it can be suspended on a wall. As shown, it is 30 inches long from bottom to top, and 20 inches wide. The shelves are 8 inches wide. All the material is, preferably, ¾-inch stock.
A sad-iron holder, or bookcase, shown in Fig. 252, is another simple type of structure. It can be large enough to act as a standing case with the uprights at the ends serving as legs, or the uprights may have holes at their upper ends, allowing it to be hung on a wall. As illustrated, it is 30 inches tall from bottom to top and 20 inches wide. The shelves are 8 inches deep. All the material should ideally be ¾-inch thickness.
Fig. 253 shows a wood-box, or it may readily be adapted for coal. For wood it should be 2 feet long, 1 foot 8 inches wide and 1 foot 10 inches high. It will, of course, be made of such dimensions as to suit the wood to be stored in it, and both the flat-top as well as the sloping portion of the top should be hinged, so that the entire top can be opened for filling purposes.
Fig. 253 shows a wood box, which can also easily be modified for coal. For wood, it should be 2 feet long, 1 foot 8 inches wide, and 1 foot 10 inches high. Naturally, it will be sized to fit the wood intended for storage, and both the flat top and the sloping part of the top should be hinged, allowing the whole top to open for filling.
A pair of parallel bars is shown in Fig. 254. The dimensions of this will vary, and be dependent on the size of the boy intending to use it; but a size best adapted is to make the posts 3 feet high, [Pg 161] and the distance between the bars 16 inches. This gives ample room for the exercises required. The length between the posts along the bars should be at least 5 feet. The entire structure can be made of soft wood, except the bars, which should be of hard, rigid wood. The posts can be made of 2" × 2" material, and the braces 2" × 1". The base [Pg 162] pieces, both longitudinal and transverse, should also be of 2" × 2" material.
A pair of parallel bars is shown in Fig. 254. The dimensions will vary based on the size of the boy using them, but a good size is to make the posts 3 feet high, [Pg 161] with the distance between the bars at 16 inches. This provides enough space for the necessary exercises. The length between the posts along the bars should be at least 5 feet. The whole structure can be made of soft wood, except the bars, which should be made of hard, sturdy wood. The posts can be made from 2" × 2" material, and the braces from 2" × 1". The base [Pg 162] pieces, both longitudinal and transverse, should also be made from 2" × 2" material.
Fig. 255 represents a mission type of writing desk for a boy's use. All the posts, braces and horizontal bars are of 2" × 2" material, secured to each other by mortises and tenons. The legs [Pg 163] are 27 inches high up to the table top, and the narrow shelf is 12 inches above the top. The most convenient size for the top is 26" × 48". The top boards may be 1 inch thick and the shelf the same thickness, or even ¾ inch. It is well braced and light, and its beauty will depend largely on the material of which it is made.
Fig. 255 shows a writing desk designed for a boy. All the posts, braces, and horizontal bars are made of 2" × 2" material and are joined together with mortises and tenons. The legs are 27 inches tall up to the tabletop, and the narrow shelf is 12 inches above the top. The ideal size for the top is 26" × 48". The top boards can be 1 inch thick, and the shelf can be the same thickness or even ¾ inch. It is well-braced and lightweight, and its appeal will largely depend on the material used to make it. [Pg 163]
The screen (Fig. 256) represents simply the [Pg 164] framework, showing how simple the structure is. The bars are all of 1½" × 1½" material, secured together by mortises and tenons.
The screen (Fig. 256) shows just the framework, illustrating how basic the structure is. The bars are all made of 1½" × 1½" material, joined together by mortises and tenons.
Fig. 257 represents a mission chair to match the desk (Fig. 255), and should be made of the same material. The posts are all of 2" × 2" material. The seat of the chair should be 16 inches, and the rear posts should extend up above the seat at least 18 inches.
Fig. 257 shows a mission chair that goes with the desk (Fig. 255) and should be made from the same material. The posts should all be 2" × 2". The seat of the chair should be 16 inches high, and the back posts should rise at least 18 inches above the seat.
[Pg 165]
[Pg 165]
Fig. 258 is a good example of a grandfather's clock in mission style. The framework only is shown. The frame is 12" × 12", and 5 feet high, and made up of 2" × 2" material. When neatly framed together, it is a most attractive article of [Pg 166] furniture. The top may be covered in any suitable way, showing a roof effect. The opening for the dial face of the clock should be at one of the gable ends.
Fig. 258 is a great example of a grandfather clock in mission style. Only the framework is shown. The frame measures 12" × 12" and stands 5 feet tall, made from 2" × 2" materials. When put together neatly, it becomes a very appealing piece of furniture. The top can be covered in any suitable manner to create a roof effect. The opening for the clock's dial face should be on one of the gable ends. [Pg 166]
A more pretentious bookcase is shown in Fig. 259, in which the frame is made up wholly of 2" × 2" material. The cross-end bars serve as ledges to support the shelves. This may be lined interiorly and backed with suitable casing material, such as Lincrusta Walton, or fiber-board, and the front provided with doors. Our only object is to show the framework for your guidance, and merely to make suggestions as to structural forms.
A fancier bookcase is shown in Fig. 259, where the frame is entirely made of 2" × 2" material. The cross-end bars act as ledges to support the shelves. This can be lined inside and backed with suitable casing material, like Lincrusta Walton or fiber-board, and have doors at the front. Our main goal is to show the framework for your reference and to offer suggestions on structural designs.
Another most serviceable article is a case for a coal scuttle (Fig. 260). This should be made of 1-inch boards, and the size of the door, which carries the scuttle shelf, should be 12" × 16" in size. From this you can readily measure the dimensions [Pg 167] of the case itself, the exterior dimensions of which are 15" × 20", so that when the 1-inch top is placed on, it will be 21 inches high. The case from front to rear is 12 inches, and the shelf above the top is 11 inches wide, and elevated 10 inches above the top of the case. This is a most useful box for culinary articles, if not needed for coal, because the ledge, used for the coal scuttle, can be used to place utensils on, and when the door is opened all the utensils are exposed to view, and are, therefore, much more accessible than if stored away in the case itself.
Another very useful item is a case for a coal scuttle (Fig. 260). This should be made of 1-inch boards, and the size of the door that holds the scuttle shelf should be 12" × 16". From this, you can easily measure the dimensions of the case itself, which measures 15" × 20" on the outside, so when the 1-inch top is put on, it will be 21 inches high. The depth of the case from front to back is 12 inches, and the shelf above is 11 inches wide and raised 10 inches above the top of the case. This is a very handy box for kitchen items if it's not used for coal, because the ledge used for the coal scuttle can hold utensils, and when the door is opened, all the utensils are visible and much more accessible than if they were stored inside the case. [Pg 167]
A mission armchair. Fig. 261 is more elaborate than the chair shown in Fig. 257, but it is the same in general character, and is also made of 2" × 2" stock. The seat is elevated 16 inches from the floor, and the rear posts are 28 inches high. [Pg 168] The arms are 8 inches above the seat. A chair of this character should have ample seat space, so the seat is 18" × 18".
A mission armchair. Fig. 261 is more detailed than the chair in Fig. 257, but it has the same overall style and is also made of 2" × 2" material. The seat is 16 inches off the ground, and the back posts are 28 inches tall. [Pg 168] The arms are 8 inches above the seat. A chair like this should have plenty of seat space, so the seat dimensions are 18" × 18".
The dog house (Fig. 262), made in imitation of a dwelling, is 24 inches square, and 18 inches high to the eaves of the roof. The opening in front is 8" × 10", exclusive of the shaped portion of the opening.
The dog house (Fig. 262), designed to look like a home, is 24 inches square and 18 inches high at the roof eaves. The front opening measures 8" × 10", not counting the decorative part of the opening.
Fig. 263 shows a simple and easily constructed settee with an under shelf. The seat is 16 inches from the floor and 24 inches wide. The back extends up 24 inches from the seat. The lower shelf is midway between the floor and seat, and [Pg 169] is 19 inches wide. This may or may not be upholstered, dependent on the character of the material of which it is made. If upholstered, the boards may be of second-class material, preferably of pine or other light, soft wood.
Fig. 263 shows a simple and easy-to-build settee with a shelf underneath. The seat is 16 inches off the ground and 24 inches wide. The back rises 24 inches from the seat. The lower shelf is halfway between the floor and the seat and is 19 inches wide. This shelf can be upholstered or not, depending on the type of material used. If it's upholstered, the boards can be made from lower-quality materials, ideally pine or another lightweight, soft wood. [Pg 169]
A towel rack (Fig. 264) is always a needed article in the kitchen. The roller may be an old curtain roller cut down to 18 inches in length. The top piece is 2½ inches wide and 21 inches long. The vertical bars are each 1½ inches wide and 9 inches long. The brackets are 1½ inches wide and made of ¾-inch material.
A towel rack (Fig. 264) is always a necessary item in the kitchen. The roller can be an old curtain roller trimmed to 18 inches in length. The top piece is 2½ inches wide and 21 inches long. The vertical bars are each 1½ inches wide and 9 inches long. The brackets are 1½ inches wide and made of ¾-inch material.
Fig. 265 represents the framework of a sofa, the seat of which is 16 inches high, the front posts up to the arm-rests 24 inches, and the rear posts 38 inches. From front to rear the seat is 18 inches. The posts are of 3" × 3" material. This makes a very rigid article of furniture, if mortised and tenoned and properly glued. The seat is 6 feet long, but it may be lengthened or shortened to suit the position in which it is to be placed. It is a companion piece to the chair (Fig. 261).
Fig. 265 shows the structure of a sofa, with the seat height at 16 inches, the front posts reaching 24 inches up to the armrests, and the rear posts at 38 inches. The seat depth from front to back is 18 inches. The posts are made from 3" × 3" material. This construction creates a sturdy piece of furniture, provided that it is mortised, tenoned, and properly glued. The seat is 6 feet long but can be adjusted to be longer or shorter depending on the intended placement. It pairs well with the chair (Fig. 261).
[Pg 170]
[Pg 170]
CHAPTER XVIII
SPECIAL TOOLS AND THEIR USES
In the foregoing chapters we have referred the reader to the simple tools, but it is thought desirable to add to the information thus given, an outline of numerous special tools which have been devised and are now on the market.
In the previous chapters, we have mentioned the basic tools, but we think it’s useful to provide additional information by outlining various specialized tools that have been developed and are currently available in the market.
Bit and Level Adjuster.—It is frequently necessary to bore holes at certain angles. This can be done by using a bevel square, and holding it so one limb will show the boring angle. But this is difficult to do in many cases.
Bit and Level Controller.—It's often necessary to drill holes at specific angles. You can do this with a bevel square, positioning it so that one side indicates the drilling angle. However, this can be challenging in many situations.
This tool has three pairs of V slots on its back edges. The shank of the bit will lie in these slots, as shown in Fig. 266, either vertically, or at an angle of 45 degrees, and boring can be done with the utmost accuracy. It may be attached to a Carpenter's square, thus making it an accurate plumb or level.
This tool has three pairs of V slots on its back edges. The shank of the bit will sit in these slots, as shown in Fig. 266, either vertically or at a 45-degree angle, allowing for extremely accurate boring. It can be attached to a carpenter's square, turning it into a precise plumb or level.
[Pg 171] Miter Boxes.—The advantages of metal miter boxes is apparent, when accurate work is required.
[Pg 171] Miter Boxes.—The benefits of metal miter boxes are clear when precise work is needed.
The illustration, Fig. 267, shows a metal tool of this kind, in which the entire frame is in one solid casting. The saw guide uprights are clamped in tapered sockets in the swivel arm and can be adjusted to hold the saw without play, and this will also counteract a saw that runs out of true, due to improper setting or filing.
The illustration, Fig. 267, shows a metal tool of this type, where the whole frame is made from a single solid casting. The saw guide uprights are secured in tapered sockets in the swivel arm and can be adjusted to hold the saw snugly, which also helps fix a saw that's not straight due to improper setup or filing.
A second socket in the swivel arm permits the use of a short saw or allows a much longer stroke with a standard or regular saw.
A second socket in the swivel arm allows for the use of a short saw or enables a much longer stroke with a standard saw.
The swivel arm is provided with a tapering index pin which engages in holes placed on the under [Pg 172] side of the base. The edge of the base is graduated in degrees, as plainly shown, and the swivel arm can be set and automatically fastened at any degree desired.
The swivel arm has a tapered index pin that fits into holes on the underside of the base. The base's edge is marked in degrees, as clearly shown, and the swivel arm can be adjusted and automatically locked in at any desired degree.
The uprights, front and back are graduated in sixteenths of inches, and movable stops can be set, by means of thumb-screw to the depth of the cut desired.
The uprights, both front and back, are marked in sixteenths of an inch, and adjustable stops can be set using a thumbscrew to the desired cutting depth.
Figure 268 shows the parts of the miter box, in which the numbers designate the various parts: 101 is the frame; 102 the frame board; 104 frame [Pg 173] leg; 106 guide stock; 107 stock guide clamp; 109 stock guide plate; 110 swivel arm; 111 swivel arm bushing; 112 swivel bushing screw; 113 index clamping lever; 115 index clamping lever catch; 116 index clamping lever spring; 122 swivel complete; 123 T-base; 124½ uprights; 126 saw guide cap; 127 saw guide cap plate; 132 saw guide tie bar; 133 left saw guide stop and screw; 134 right side guide stop and screw; 135 saw guide stop spring; 136 saw guide cylinder; 137 saw guide cylinder plate; 138 trip lever (back); 139 trip lever (front); 141 leveling screw; 142 trip clamp and screw; 146 T-base clamp screw.
Figure 268 shows the parts of the miter box, where the numbers represent the different components: 101 is the frame; 102 is the frame board; 104 is the frame leg; 106 is the guide stock; 107 is the stock guide clamp; 109 is the stock guide plate; 110 is the swivel arm; 111 is the swivel arm bushing; 112 is the swivel bushing screw; 113 is the index clamping lever; 115 is the index clamping lever catch; 116 is the index clamping lever spring; 122 is the swivel complete; 123 is the T-base; 124½ are the uprights; 126 is the saw guide cap; 127 is the saw guide cap plate; 132 is the saw guide tie bar; 133 is the left saw guide stop and screw; 134 is the right side guide stop and screw; 135 is the saw guide stop spring; 136 is the saw guide cylinder; 137 is the saw guide cylinder plate; 138 is the trip lever (back); 139 is the trip lever (front); 141 is the leveling screw; 142 is the trip clamp and screw; 146 is the T-base clamp screw.
Angle Dividers.—This is another tool, which does not cost much and is of great service to the [Pg 174] carpenter in fitting moldings where they are applied at odd angles.
Angle Dividers.—This is another tool that doesn't cost much and is really helpful to the [Pg 174] carpenter when fitting moldings at odd angles.
To lay out the cut with an ordinary bevel necessitates the use of dividers and a second handling of the bevel, making three operations.
To outline the cut with a standard bevel requires the use of dividers and handling the bevel a second time, resulting in three steps.
The "Odd Job" Tool.—A most useful special tool, which combines in its make-up a level, plumb try-square, miter-square, bevel, scratch awl, depth gage, marking gage, miter gage, beam compass, and a one-foot rule. To the boy who wishes to economize in the purchase of tools this is an article which should be obtained.
The "Side Hustle" Tool.—A really handy special tool that includes a level, plumb bob, try-square, miter-square, bevel, scratch awl, depth gauge, marking gauge, miter gauge, beam compass, and a one-foot ruler. For the young person who wants to save money on buying tools, this is an item worth getting.
Figure 270 shows the simplicity of the tool, and how it is applied in use.
Figure 270 shows how simple the tool is and how it's used.
Bit Braces.—These tools are now made with so [Pg 175] many improved features that there is really no excuse for getting poor tools.
Bit Braces.—These tools are now designed with so many improved features that there's really no reason to settle for subpar tools. [Pg 175]
The illustrations show merely the heads and the lower operating parts of the tools. Fig. 271 shows a metal-clad ball-bearing head, so called, as its under side is completely encased in metal securely screwed to the wood and revolving against the ball thrust bearing.
The illustrations only display the heads and the lower operating parts of the tools. Fig. 271 shows a metal-clad ball-bearing head, named as such because its underside is entirely covered in metal, which is securely screwed to the wood and rotates against the ball thrust bearing.
D represents a concealed ratchet in which the cam ring governs the ratchet, and, being in line with the bit, makes it more convenient in handling than when it is at right angles. The ratchet parts are entirely enclosed, thus keeping out moisture and dirt, retaining lubrication and protecting the users' hands.
D represents a hidden ratchet where the cam ring controls the ratchet, and since it is aligned with the bit, it is easier to handle than when it's at a right angle. The ratchet components are fully enclosed, keeping out moisture and dirt, maintaining lubrication, and protecting the users' hands.
The ratchet mechanism is interchangeable, and may be taken apart by removing one screw. The two-piece clutch, which is drop forged, is backed by a very strong spring, insuring a secure lock. When locked, ten teeth are in engagement, while five are employed while working at a ratchet. It has universal jaws (G) for both wood and metal workers.
The ratchet mechanism is interchangeable and can be disassembled by removing a single screw. The two-piece clutch, which is drop forged, is supported by a very strong spring, ensuring a secure lock. When locked, ten teeth engage, while five are used during ratcheting. It features universal jaws (G) suitable for both wood and metalworkers.
In Fig. 272, B represents a regular ball bearing head, with the wood screw on the large spindle and three small screws to prevent its working loose. This also has a ball thrust. E is the ratchet box, and this shows the gear teeth cut on the extra [Pg 176] heavy spindle, and encased, so that the user's hands are protected from the teeth.
In Fig. 272, B shows a standard ball bearing head, with the wood screw on the large spindle and three small screws to keep it from coming loose. It also features a ball thrust. E is the ratchet box, which displays the gear teeth cut into the extra heavy spindle, and it's enclosed to protect the user's hands from the teeth. [Pg 176]
The interlocking jaws (H), which are best for taper shanks, hold up to No. 2 Clark's expansion, and are therefore particularly adapted for carpenter's use.
The interlocking jaws (H), which are ideal for taper shanks, accommodate up to No. 2 Clark's expansion, making them especially suited for carpenters.
In Fig. 273 the plain bearing head (C) has no ball thrust. The head is screwed on the spindle and [Pg 177] held from turning off by two small screws. The open ratchet (F) shows the gear pinned to the spindle and exposed. This has alligator jaws (J), and will hold all ordinary size taper shank bits, also small and medium round shank bits or drills.
In Fig. 273, the plain bearing head (C) doesn’t have any ball thrust. The head is screwed onto the spindle and is kept from turning off by two small screws. The open ratchet (F) shows the gear pinned to the spindle and exposed. It has alligator jaws (J) that will hold all standard size taper shank bits, as well as small and medium round shank bits or drills.
Steel Frame Breast Drill.—These drills are made with both single and double speed, each speed having three varieties of jaws. The single speed is very high, the ratio being 4½ to 1, which makes [Pg 178] it desirable to use for small drills, or for use in wood.
Steel Frame Breast Drill.—These drills come in both single and double speeds, with each speed having three types of jaws. The single speed is quite high, with a ratio of 4½ to 1, making it ideal for small drills or for use in wood. [Pg 178]
A level is firmly set in the frames of these tools to assist the user to maintain a horizontal position in boring. Each of the forms shown has a ball thrust bearing between the pinion and frame. The breast plate may be adjusted to suit and is locked by a set screw. The spindle is kept from turning while changing drills, by means of the latch mounted on the frame, and readily engaging with the pinion. The crank is pierced in three places so that the handle can be set for three different sweeps, depending on the character of the work.
A level is securely positioned within the frames of these tools to help the user keep a horizontal line while drilling. Each of the designs features a ball thrust bearing between the pinion and the frame. The breast plate can be adjusted as needed and is secured with a set screw. The spindle is prevented from spinning while changing drills by a latch attached to the frame that easily engages with the pinion. The crank has three holes so that the handle can be set for three different sweeps, depending on the type of work being done.
Figure 274 has a three jaw chuck, and has only single speed. Figure 275 has an interlocking jaw, and is provided with double speed gearing. Figure 276 has a universal jaw, and double speed.
Figure 274 has a three-jaw chuck and only a single speed. Figure 275 features an interlocking jaw and comes with double-speed gearing. Figure 276 has a universal jaw and double speed.
Planes.—The most serviceable planes are made in iron, and it might be well to show a few of the most important, to bring out the manner employed to make the adjustments of the bits.
Airplanes.—The most useful planes are made of iron, and it would be helpful to show a few key examples to highlight how the adjustments of the bits are made.
In order to familiarize the boy with the different terms used in a plane, examine Figure 277. The parts are designated as follows: 1A is the double plane iron; 1 single plane iron; 2 plane iron cap; 3 cap screw; 4 lever cap; 5 lever cap screw; 6 frog complete; 7 Y adjusting lever; 8 adjusting nut; 9 lateral adjusting lever; 11 plane handle; [Pg 179] 12 plane knob; 13 handle bolt and nut; 14 knob bolt and nut; 15 plane handle screw; 16 plane bottom; 44 frog pin; 45 frog clamping screw; 46 frog adjusting screw.
To help the boy understand the different terms used in a plane, take a look at Figure 277. The parts are labeled as follows: 1A is the double plane iron; 1 is the single plane iron; 2 is the plane iron cap; 3 is the cap screw; 4 is the lever cap; 5 is the lever cap screw; 6 is the complete frog; 7 is the Y adjusting lever; 8 is the adjusting nut; 9 is the lateral adjusting lever; 11 is the plane handle; [Pg 179] 12 is the plane knob; 13 is the handle bolt and nut; 14 is the knob bolt and nut; 15 is the plane handle screw; 16 is the plane bottom; 44 is the frog pin; 45 is the frog clamping screw; 46 is the frog adjusting screw.
Rabbeting, Matching and Dado Planes.—Figure 278 shows a useful form of plane for the reason that it is designed to receive a variety of irons, adapted to cut rabbets.
Rabbeting, matching, and dado planes.—Figure 278 shows a practical type of plane because it's made to hold different blades that are used for cutting rabbets.
The detached sections of Fig. 278 show the various parts, as well as the bits which belong to it. 1, 1 represent the single plane irons; 4 the lever cap; 16 the plane bottom, 50 the fence; 51 the fence thumb screw; 61 the short arm; 70 the adjustable [Pg 180] depth gage; 71 the depth gage which goes through the screw; and 85 the spurs with screws.
The separate parts of Fig. 278 display the different components, along with the pieces that belong to it. 1, 1 indicate the individual plane irons; 4 is the lever cap; 16 is the plane bottom; 50 is the fence; 51 is the fence thumb screw; 61 is the short arm; 70 is the adjustable [Pg 180] depth gauge; 71 is the depth gauge that goes through the screw; and 85 are the spurs with screws.
Molding and Beading Plane.—A plane of the character shown in Fig. 279 will do an immense variety of work in molding, beading and dado work, and is equally well adapted for rabbeting, for filletsters and for match planing. The regular equipment with this tool comprises fifty-two cutters.
Molding and Beading Plane.—A plane like the one shown in Fig. 279 can handle a wide range of tasks in molding, beading, and dado work. It's also perfect for rabbeting, filletsters, and match planing. This tool typically comes with fifty-two cutters.
As shown in Fig. 279, the plane has a main stock (A), which carries the cutter adjustment, a handle, a depth gage, a slitting gage, and a steel bottom forming a bearing for the other end of the cutter, and slides on arms secured to the main stock.
As shown in Fig. 279, the plane has a main body (A), which holds the cutter adjustment, a handle, a depth gauge, a slitting gauge, and a steel base that acts as a support for the other end of the cutter, and it slides on arms attached to the main body.
This bottom can be raised or lowered, so that, in addition to allowing the use of cutters of different [Pg 181] widths, cutters can be used having one edge higher or lower than the edge supported in the main stock.
This bottom can be adjusted up or down, allowing for the use of cutters of varying widths, and cutters can also be used with one edge set higher or lower than the edge supported in the main stock. [Pg 181]
The auxiliary center bottom (C), which can be adjusted for width or depth, fulfils the requirement of preventing the plane from tilting and gouging the work. The fence D has a lateral adjustment by means of a screw, for extra fine work. [Pg 182] The four small cuts in the corners show how the bottoms should be set for different forms of cutters, and the great importance of having the fences adjusted so that the cutters will not run.
The auxiliary center bottom (C), which can be adjusted for width or depth, meets the need to keep the plane from tilting and damaging the work. The fence D has a lateral adjustment with a screw for extra fine work. [Pg 182] The four small cuts in the corners indicate how the bottoms should be set for different types of cutters, highlighting the crucial importance of adjusting the fences so that the cutters won’t slip.
The samples of work illustrated show some of the moldings which can be turned out with the plane.
The examples of work shown demonstrate some of the moldings that can be created with the plane.
Dovetail Tongue and Groove Plane.—This is a very novel tool, and has many features to recommend it. Figure 280 shows its form, and how it is used. It is designed to make the dovetailed tongue as well as the groove.
Dovetail tongue and groove plane.—This is a really unique tool, and it has many qualities that make it appealing. Figure 280 shows its shape and how to use it. It's made to create both the dovetailed tongue and the groove.
It will cut any size groove and tongues to fit with sides of twenty degrees flare, where the width [Pg 183] of the neck is more than one-quarter of an inch thick, and the depth of the groove not more than three-quarters of an inch. The tongue and groove are cut separately, and can be made with parallel or tapering sides. The operation of the plane is very simple.
It can cut grooves and tongues of any size to fit with sides that flare at a twenty-degree angle, as long as the neck is thicker than one-quarter of an inch, and the depth of the groove doesn't exceed three-quarters of an inch. The tongue and groove are cut separately and can be made with either parallel or tapering sides. Using the plane is really straightforward. [Pg 183]
Router Planes.
Router Planes.
Router Planes.—This is a type of plane used for surfacing the bottom of grooves or other depressions parallel with the general surface of the work.
Router Plans.—This is a type of plane used for flattening the bottom of grooves or other indentations to be even with the overall surface of the work.
The planes are made in two types, one, like Fig. 281, which has a closed throat, and the other, Fig. 282, with an open throat. Both are serviceable, but the latter is preferable. These planes will [Pg 184] level off bottoms of depression, very accurately, and the tool is not an expensive one.
The planes come in two types: one, like Fig. 281, has a closed throat, and the other, Fig. 282, has an open throat. Both are effective, but the second one is better. These planes will level the bottoms of depressions very accurately, and they are not expensive tools. [Pg 184]
Door Trim Plane.—This is a tool for making mortises for butts, face plates, strike plates, escutcheons, and the like, up to a depth of 5/16, and a width of 3 inches. The principal feature in the plane is the method of mounting the cutter, which can be instantly set to work from either end of the plane or across it.
Door Trim Plane.—This is a tool used for creating mortises for hinges, face plates, strike plates, escutcheons, and similar items, up to a depth of 5/16 and a width of 3 inches. The main feature of the plane is how the cutter is mounted, allowing it to be quickly set to work from either end of the plane or across it.
The cutter, as shown in Fig. 283, is cushioned by a spring which prevents taking a heavier chip than can be easily carried. A fence regulates the position of the cut and insures the sides of the cut being parallel. The depth of the cut is governed by a positive stop. By removing the fence and locking the cutter post with the thumb screw, instead of using the spring, a very superior router plane is obtained.
The cutter, as shown in Fig. 283, is cushioned by a spring that prevents it from taking a heavier chip than can be easily handled. A fence sets the position of the cut and ensures that the sides of the cut are parallel. The depth of the cut is controlled by a positive stop. By removing the fence and locking the cutter post with the thumb screw, instead of using the spring, you can create a much better router plane.
[Pg 185]
[Pg 185]
CHAPTER XIX
ROOFING TRUSSES
The chapter on Bridge Building gives some suggestions as to form of trusses, the particular types there shown being principally for wide spans. Such trusses were made for one purpose only, namely, to take great weight, and they were, as a consequence, so constructed as to provide strength.
The chapter on Bridge Building offers some ideas on truss designs, with the specific types shown mainly intended for wide spans. These trusses were built for a single purpose: to support heavy loads, and as a result, they were designed to ensure strength.
But a roofing truss, while designed to hold the accumulated materials, such as snow and ice, likely to be deposited there, is of such a design, principally, so as to afford means of ornamentation. This remark has reference to such types as dispense with the cross, or tie beam, which is the distinguishing feature in bridge building.
But a roofing truss, while made to support the buildup of materials like snow and ice that might land on it, is mainly designed to allow for decoration. This comment refers to types that do away with the cross, or tie beam, which is the key feature in bridge construction.
The tie beam is also an important element in many types of trusses, where ornamentation is not required, or in such structures as have the roofed portion of the buildings enclosed by ceiling walls, or where the space between the roofs is used for storage purposes.
The tie beam is also a key component in many types of trusses where decoration is unnecessary, or in structures where the roofed sections of the buildings are enclosed by ceiling walls, or where the area between the roofs is used for storage.
In England, and on the Continent of Europe, are thousands of trusses structured to support the roofs, which are marvels of beauty. Some of them [Pg 186] are bewildering in their formation. The moldings, beaded surfaces, and the carved outlines of the soffits, of the arches, and of the purlins, are wonderful in detail.
In England and throughout Europe, there are thousands of trusses designed to support roofs, and they are stunningly beautiful. Some of them are truly perplexing in their design. The moldings, beaded surfaces, and intricately carved outlines of the soffits, arches, and purlins are amazing in their detail. [Pg 186]
The wooden roof of Westminster Hall, while very simple in structure, as compared with many others, looks like an intricate maze of beams, struts and braces, but it is, nevertheless, so harmonized that the effect is most pleasing to the eye, and its very appearance gives the impression of grandeur and strength.
The wooden roof of Westminster Hall, although quite simple in design compared to many others, resembles a complicated maze of beams, struts, and braces. However, it is so well coordinated that the overall look is very pleasing to the eye, and its appearance conveys a sense of grandeur and strength.
Nearly all of the forms shown herein have come down to us from mediæval times, when more stress was laid on wooden structures than at the present time, but most of the stone and metal buildings grew out of the wooden prototypes.
Nearly all of the forms shown here have been passed down from medieval times, when more emphasis was placed on wooden structures than today. However, most of the stone and metal buildings developed from these wooden prototypes.
Now the prime object of nearly all the double-roofed trusses was to utilize the space between the rafters so as to give height and majesty to the interior.
Now, the main goal of almost all the double-roofed trusses was to make use of the space between the rafters to add height and grandeur to the interior.
A large dome is grand, owing to its great simplicity, but the same plain outlines, or lack of ornamentation, in the ceiling of a square or rectangular building would be painful to view, hence, the braces, beams, plates, and various supports of the roofed truss served as ornamental parts, and it is in this particular that the art of the designer finds his inspiration.
A large dome looks impressive because of its simplicity, but the same simple lines or lack of decoration in the ceiling of a square or rectangular building would be unpleasant to look at. Therefore, the braces, beams, plates, and different supports of the roof truss function as decorative elements, and it's here that the designer's art draws its inspiration.
[Pg 187] Before proceeding to apply the matter of ornamentation, it might be well to develop these roof forms, starting with the old type Barn Roof, where the space between the rafters must be utilized for the storage of hay.
[Pg 187] Before moving on to the topic of decoration, it would be a good idea to explore these roof designs, beginning with the traditional Barn Roof, where the area between the rafters should be used for storing hay.
The Gambrel Roof, Fig. 284, requires a tie beam, (A), as shown, but the space above the beam is free of all obstructions, and gives a large storage space. The roof has two sets of rafters (B, C), and of different pitch, the lower rafters (B) having a pitch of about 30 degrees, and the upper ones (C), about 45 degrees.
The Gambrel Roof, Fig. 284, needs a tie beam, (A), as shown, but the area above the beam is completely clear, providing ample storage space. The roof features two sets of rafters (B, C) with different angles: the lower rafters (B) have an angle of about 30 degrees, while the upper ones (C) are at about 45 degrees.
[Pg 188] A tie bar (D) joins the middle portion of each of the rafters (B, C) and another tie bar (E) joins the middle part of the rafter (B), and the supporting post (F). The cross tie beam (G) completes the span, and a little study will show the complete interdependence of one piece upon the other.
[Pg 188] A tie bar (D) connects the middle part of each of the rafters (B, C), and another tie bar (E) connects the middle of rafter (B) to the supporting post (F). The cross tie beam (G) finishes the span, and a bit of analysis will reveal how each piece relies on the others.
The Purlin Roof is a type of structure used very largely throughout the United States, for wide barns. (A) is the cross beam; (B, B) the purlin posts; (C, C) the purlin plates; (D, D) the rafters; and (E, E) the supporting braces.
The Purlin Roof is a type of structure commonly used across the United States for large barns. (A) is the cross beam; (B, B) are the purlin posts; (C, C) are the purlin plates; (D, D) are the rafters; and (E, E) are the supporting braces.
The rafters (D) are in two sections, the distance from the eaves to the comb being too great for single length rafters, and the purlin plates are not designed to make what is called a "self-supporting" roof, but merely to serve as supports for the regular rafters.
The rafters (D) are in two sections because the distance from the eaves to the peak is too long for single-length rafters, and the purlin plates aren't meant to create a "self-supporting" roof. They are just intended to act as supports for the regular rafters.
[Pg 189] The Princess Truss, on the other hand, is designed to act as a support for the different lengths of rafters (A, B, C), and as a means for holding the roof. It is adapted for low pitch and wide spans.
[Pg 189] The Princess Truss, on the other hand, is made to support various lengths of rafters (A, B, C) and help hold the roof. It's suitable for low pitches and wide spans.
The main truss is made up of the cross beam (D), rafters (E, E) and thrust beam (F). Purlin posts (G, G) are placed at an angle intermediate the ends of the rafters, and the purlin plates (H, H) support the roof rafters (A, B, C); I, I are the vertical tie rods.
The main truss consists of the cross beam (D), rafters (E, E), and thrust beam (F). Purlin posts (G, G) are angled between the ends of the rafters, and the purlin plates (H, H) support the roof rafters (A, B, C); I, I are the vertical tie rods.
This type is probably the oldest form of truss for building purposes, and it has been modified in many ways, the most usual modification being the substitution of posts for the tie rods (I, I).
This type is probably the oldest form of truss used for construction, and it has been changed in many ways, with the most common adjustment being the replacement of tie rods with posts (I, I).
Following out the foregoing forms, we may [Pg 190] call attention to one more type which permitted ornamentation to a considerable degree, although it still required the tie beam. In fact the tie beam itself was the feature on which the architect depended to make the greatest effect by elaborating it.
Following the previous examples, we can point out one more type that allowed for a significant amount of ornamentation, although it still needed the tie beam. In fact, the tie beam itself was the key element that the architect relied on to create the most impact by enhancing it.
This is shown in Fig. 287, and is called the Arched, or Cambered, Tie Beam Truss. It is a very old type, samples of which have been found which take it back to a very remote age.
This is shown in Fig. 287, and is called the Arched, or Cambered, Tie Beam Truss. It is a very old type, and examples of it have been found dating back to a very ancient time.
The tie beam A, in wide spans, was made in two sections, properly tied together, and sometimes the outer ends were very wide, and to add to the effect of the arch, it might also be raised in the middle, something in the form shown by the dotted line (B).
The tie beam A, in large spans, was constructed in two sections that were securely joined, and at times, the outer ends were quite wide. To enhance the appearance of the arch, it could also be elevated in the center, similar to the shape indicated by the dotted line (B).
The Mansard is what may be called a double-mounted roof, and it will be seen how it was [Pg 191] evolved from the preceding types. It will be noted that the simple truss formed by the members (A, B, C) is merely superposed on the leaning posts, the tie beam also being necessary in this construction.
The Mansard is what you would call a double-sloped roof, and you can see how it developed from the earlier types. It's important to note that the simple truss made up of the members (A, B, C) is just placed on top of the slanted posts, with the tie beam also being essential in this design. [Pg 191]
But the most elaborate formations are those which were intended to provide trusses for buildings wherein the tie beams were dispensed with.
But the most complex structures are those designed to provide support for buildings where the tie beams were omitted.
The simplest form known is called the Scissors Beam, illustrated in Fig. 289. This has been utilized for small spaces, and steep pitches. Each rafter (A) has an angled beam or brace (B), springing from its base, to the opposite rafter (A), [Pg 192] to which it is joined, midway between its ends, as at C.
The simplest form known is called the Scissors Beam, shown in Fig. 289. This has been used for small areas and steep angles. Each rafter (A) has an angled beam or brace (B) that extends from its base to the opposite rafter (A), where it connects halfway between its ends, as at C. [Pg 192]
Where the two braces (B) cross each other they are secured together, as at D. As a result, three trusses are formed, namely, 1, 2, 3, and it possesses remarkable strength.
Where the two braces (B) intersect, they are fastened together, as seen at D. As a result, three trusses are created, namely, 1, 2, 3, and it has impressive strength.
Braced Collar Beam.—This is a modification of the last type, but is adapted for thick walls only. The tie rod braces (A, A) have to be brought down low to give a good bracing action, and this [Pg 193] arrangement is capable of considerable ornamentation.
Braced Collar Beam.—This is a variation of the previous type, but it's designed specifically for thick walls. The tie rod braces (A, A) need to be positioned low to provide effective bracing, and this setup allows for substantial decoration. [Pg 193]
The steeper the pitch the higher up would be the inner and lower brace posts (B, B) which were supported by the top of the wall. This form is not available for wide spans, and is shown to illustrate how the development was made into the succeeding types.
The steeper the pitch, the higher the inner and lower brace posts (B, B) would be, which were supported by the top of the wall. This design isn’t suitable for wide spans, and it's shown to demonstrate how the development led to the following types.
The Rib and Collar Truss, Fig. 291, is the first [Pg 194] important structural arrangement which permitted the architect to give full sway to embellishment. The inwardly-projecting members (A, A) are called Hammer Beams. They were devised as a substitute for the thick walls used in the Braced Collar Beam Truss, and small brackets (B, B) were placed beneath as supports.
The Rib and Collar Beam, Fig. 291, is the first [Pg 194] important structural design that allowed the architect to fully embrace decoration. The inwardly-projecting members (A, A) are known as Hammer Beams. They were created as an alternative to the heavy walls used in the Braced Collar Beam Truss, with small brackets (B, B) positioned underneath for support.
The short tie beam (C), near the apex, serves as the member to receive the thrust and stress of the curved ribs (D, D). It forms a most graceful type of roof, and is capable of the most exquisite ornamentation, but it is used for the high pitched roofs only.
The short tie beam (C), located near the peak, acts as the component that absorbs the pressure and strain from the curved ribs (D, D). It creates a very elegant style of roof and can be beautifully decorated, but it’s only used for high-pitched roofs.
[Pg 195]
[Pg 195]
The acme of all constructions, in which strength, beauty, and capacity for ornamentation are blended, is the Hammer Beam Truss. Here the hammer beam projects inwardly farther than in the preceding figure, and has a deeper bracket (B), and this also extends down the pendant post (C) a greater distance.
The pinnacle of all structures, where strength, beauty, and the ability to be decorated come together, is the Hammer Beam Truss. In this design, the hammer beam extends inward more than in the previous example and features a deeper bracket (B), which also extends further down the pendant post (C).
[Pg 196] The curved supporting arch (D), on each side, is not ribbed, as in the Rib and Collar Truss, but instead, is provided with openwork (not shown herein), together with beadings and moldings, and other ornamental characteristics, and some of the most beautiful architectural forms in existence are in this type of roof.
[Pg 196] The curved support arch (D) on each side isn’t ribbed like in the Rib and Collar Truss. Instead, it features openwork (not shown here), along with beadings, moldings, and other decorative elements. Some of the most stunning architectural designs in existence are found in this type of roof.
What are called Flying Buttresses (E) are sometimes used in connection with the Hammer Beam Truss, which, with heavy roofs and wide spans, is found to be absolutely necessary.
What are known as Flying Buttresses (E) are sometimes used alongside the Hammer Beam Truss, which is essential for heavy roofs and wide spans.
[Pg 197]
[Pg 197]
CHAPTER XX
ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF JOINTS
In uniting two or more elements, some particular type of joint is necessary. In framing timbers, in making braces, in roof construction and supports, in floor beams, and in numerous other places, where strength is required, the workman should have at his command a knowledge of the most serviceable methods.
In combining two or more elements, a specific type of joint is essential. When framing timber, making braces, constructing roofs and supports, in floor beams, and in many other areas where strength is needed, the worker should have a solid understanding of the most effective methods.
Illustrations can most forcibly convey the different types; but the sizes must be determined by the character of the material you are working with. Our aim is to give the idea involved, and the name by which each is known.
Illustrations can most effectively convey the different types, but the sizes need to be determined by the nature of the material you’re working with. Our goal is to communicate the idea involved and the name by which each is known.
Reference has been made in Chapter X, to certain forms of scarfing and lapping pieces. This chapter has to do with a variety of other structural [Pg 198] forms, but principally with such as are used in heavy building work, and in cases where neither fish plates nor scarfing will answer the purpose.
Reference has been made in Chapter X to certain types of scarfing and lapping pieces. This chapter focuses on various other structural forms, but mainly on those used in heavy construction and situations where neither fish plates nor scarfing will be suitable. [Pg 198]
Bridle Joints.—This is a form of joint where permanency is not desired, and where it is necessary to readily seat or unseat the vertical timber. It is also obvious that the socket for the upright is of such a character that it will not weaken it to any great extent.
Bridle Joints.—This is a type of joint where lasting attachment isn't needed, and where it's important to easily put in or take out the vertical timber. It's also clear that the socket for the upright is designed in a way that won't significantly weaken it.
Spur Tenon.—This tenon can be used in many places where the regular one is not available. This, like the preceding, is used where the parts [Pg 199] are desired to be detachable, and the second form is one which is used in many structures.
Spur Tenon.—This tenon can be used in many situations where the regular one isn’t available. Like the previous type, it’s used where the parts need to be detachable, and the second version is commonly used in various structures. [Pg 199]
Saddle Joint.—This is still another manner in which a quickly detachable joint can be constructed. The saddle may be mounted on the main base, or cut into the base piece. An infinite variety of forms of saddles are made, most of them being used in dock work, and for framing of that character where large timbers are used, as in the building of coal chutes, and the like.
Saddle Joint.—This is yet another way to create a quickly detachable joint. The saddle can be attached to the main base or integrated into the base piece. There are countless designs of saddles available, with most being utilized in dock work and for similar framing jobs where large timbers are involved, such as in the construction of coal chutes and similar structures.
Joggle Joint.—This joint is used almost exclusively for brace work where great weight must be supported. The brace has a tenon, and the end [Pg 200] must also be so arranged that it will have a direct bearing against the upright, which it braces and supports, or it may have two faces, as in the second figure, which is an exceedingly strong construction.
Joggle joint.—This joint is mainly used for brace work where heavy weight needs to be supported. The brace has a tenon, and the end [Pg 200] must be arranged to bear directly against the upright it supports and braces, or it may have two faces, as shown in the second figure, which is a very strong construction.
Framing Joints.—These are the simplest form in which two members are secured together. They are used almost wholly in rafter work, and have very few modifications. The depth of the cut, for the toe of the rafter, depends on the load to be carried, and also on the distance the end of the rafter is from the end of the horizontal member on which the rafter rests.
Framing Joints.—These are the most straightforward way to connect two pieces together. They are primarily used in rafter construction and have very few changes. The depth of the cut for the toe of the rafter depends on the load it needs to support and the distance from the end of the rafter to the end of the horizontal piece it rests on.
[Pg 201] Heel Joints.—This is by far the most secure of the framing type of joints. This, if properly made, is much better than the construction shown in the previous illustration, but the difficulty is to make the rafter fit into the recesses properly. This is no excuse for failure to use, but it is on account of inability to make close fits that is accountable for lack of use. It will be seen that in case one of the heels rests against the recess, and the others do not, and the pressure is great, there is a liability to tear out the entire joint.
[Pg 201] Heel joints.—This is definitely the most secure type of framing joint. When made correctly, it is far better than the construction shown in the previous illustration. However, the challenge lies in getting the rafter to fit into the recesses properly. This shouldn't be an excuse for not using it, but the difficulty in achieving a close fit is why it’s often not employed. You’ll notice that if one of the heels is pressed against the recess while the others aren’t, and the pressure is significant, there’s a risk of completely tearing out the joint.
Stub Tenon.—This is another form of tenon which is made and designed to be used where it is in close proximity to another tenon, or where the mortises, if made full size, will weaken the member. The long tusk can be shortened, to suit the place where it projects, and the stub tenon on each side of the tusk may be made very short, and one side longer than the other if necessary.
Stub Tenon.—This is another type of tenon that's made and designed for use when it's close to another tenon, or where full-size mortises would weaken the piece. The long tusk can be shortened to fit the space where it sticks out, and the stub tenon on each side of the tusk can be kept very short, with one side longer than the other if needed.
[Pg 202] Tusk Tenon.—Two forms of tusk construction are given. Any number of forms have been devised, all for special purposes, and designed for different kinds of woods. These shown are particularly adapted for soft woods, and the principal feature that is valuable lies in the fact that they have a number of shoulders within the mortise, each of which, necessarily adds to the strength. It should be observed that in the construction of the tusk tenon, the greatest care must be taken to have it fit the mortise tightly, and this has reference to the bottom and shoulder ends as well.
[Pg 202] Tusk Tenon Joint.—Two types of tusk construction are presented. Many variations have been created for specific purposes and designed for different types of wood. The ones shown are especially suitable for softwoods, and their main feature that adds value is that they incorporate several shoulders within the mortise, each of which enhances strength. It's important to note that when creating the tusk tenon, you must ensure it fits the mortise snugly, including at the bottom and shoulder ends.
Double Tusk Tenons.—The distinguishing difference between this and the preceding is in the tusk, which in this form of construction goes through the upright member, and is held by a cross key. The double tusk is intended for hard woods, [Pg 203] and it is regarded as the finest, as well as the strongest, joint known.
Double Tusk Tenons.—The main difference between this and the previous one is in the tusk, which in this type of construction passes through the vertical piece and is secured by a cross key. The double tusk is designed for hardwoods, [Pg 203] and it's considered the best and strongest joint available.
Cogged Joints.—This differs from the regular tenoning and mortising methods, principally because the groove or recess is in the form of an open gain. It is used where the member is to be inserted after the main structure is put together.
Cogged Joints.—This is different from the usual tenoning and mortising techniques, mainly because the groove or recess is shaped like an open gain. It's used when the piece needs to be added after the main structure is assembled.
Anchor Joint.—This form of connection is designed for very large timbers, and where great care must be taken in making the parts fit together nicely, as everything depends on this. This style [Pg 204] is never used where the angles are less than 45 degrees, and the depth of the gain in the timber receiving the brace is dependent on the thrust of the brace.
Anchor Joint.—This type of connection is made for very large wooden beams, where precision in fitting the pieces together is crucial since everything relies on it. This style is never used for angles smaller than 45 degrees, and the depth of the notch in the timber that receives the brace depends on the pressure from the brace. [Pg 204]
The Deep Anchor Joint is an extension of the tongue of the Anchor tenon, so that it affords a greater support for the end thrust. To clearly distinguish between this and the preceding form, it might be said that the Anchor Joint is one designed to protect the member containing the gains, while the Deep Anchor Joint favors the brace, by giving it a greater power.
The Deep Anchor Joint is an extension of the tongue of the Anchor tenon, providing better support for end thrust. To clearly distinguish between this and the previous form, it can be said that the Anchor Joint is meant to protect the member containing the gains, while the Deep Anchor Joint enhances the brace by giving it more strength.
[Pg 205]
[Pg 205]
CHAPTER XXI
SOME MISTAKES, AND A LITTLE ADVICE IN CARPENTRY
In the mechanical arts, workers are as likely to learn from the mistakes committed as through correct information imparted. Advice, therefore, might be considered superfluous. But there are certain things which are easily remembered and may be borne in mind while engaged in turning out any work.
In the mechanical arts, workers are just as likely to learn from their mistakes as they are from correct information shared. So, advice might seem unnecessary. However, there are certain things that are easy to remember and can be kept in mind while producing any work.
This chapter is not given for the purpose of calling attention to all the errors which are so common, but merely to point out a few which the boy will commit as he tries to carry out his work for the first time.
This chapter isn’t meant to highlight all the common mistakes, but simply to point out a few that the boy is likely to make when he tries to do his work for the first time.
One of the difficult things for any one to learn, in working with wood, is to plane the edge of a board straight and square at the same time. This is made doubly difficult if it is desired to plane it strictly to dimensions.
One of the hardest things for anyone to learn when working with wood is to plane the edge of a board so that it's straight and square at the same time. This becomes even tougher if you want to plane it to exact dimensions.
Usually before the edge is straight it is down to the proper width desired, and it is then too late to correct any error, because further work will make it too narrow.
Usually, before the edge is straight, it has been reduced to the desired width, and by that point, it's too late to fix any mistakes, because additional work will make it too narrow.
The whole difficulty is in the holding of the plane. It matters not how rigidly it is held, and [Pg 206] how carefully it is guarded to veer it toward one side or the other, it will be found a most difficult task.
The entire challenge lies in maintaining control of the plane. It doesn't matter how firmly it is held or how carefully it's prevented from drifting to one side or the other; it will still prove to be a very difficult task. [Pg 206]
If the fore, or finishing, plane is used, and which is the proper tool for the purpose, the impression seems to be, that to square up the edge and make it cut off a thicker shaving on one side than on the other, requires that the plane should be pressed down with force, so as to make it dig in and cut a thicker shaving.
If the fore or finishing plane is used, which is the right tool for the job, it seems that to square up the edge and take a thicker cut on one side than the other, the plane must be pressed down firmly to make it dig in and cut a thicker shaving.
When this is resorted to the board is liable to get out of true from end to end. A much better plan is to put the plane on the edge of the board true and straight. If it is too high on the edge nearest you, bring the plane over so the inside edge is flush with the inside edge of the board.
When this is done, the board can end up warped from one end to the other. A much better approach is to set the plane on the edge of the board to ensure it’s straight and true. If it’s too high on the side closest to you, adjust the plane so that the inside edge is even with the inside edge of the board.
Then use the fingers of the left hand as a gage to keep the plane from running over.
Then use the fingers of your left hand as a guide to prevent the plane from going off course.
Now, the weight of the plane in such a condition is sufficient to take off a thicker shaving at the high edge, and this will be done without any effort, and will enable you to concentrate your thoughts on keeping the plane straight with the board.
Now, the weight of the plane in this state is enough to take off a thicker shaving from the high edge, and this will happen effortlessly, allowing you to focus on keeping the plane straight with the board.
The weight of the plane will make a thicker shaving on one side than on the other, and correct inequalities, provided you do not attempt to force the plane.
The weight of the plane will create a thicker shaving on one side than the other, and it will correct any unevenness, as long as you don’t try to force the plane.
It requires an exceedingly steady hand to hold [Pg 207] a plane firmly for squaring up a half-inch board. Singular as it may seem, it is almost as difficult a job with a two-inch plank. In the case of the thin board the plane will move laterally, unless the utmost care is exercised; in the truing up the thick plank the constant tendency is to move the plane along the surface at a slight diagonal, and this is sure to cause trouble.
It takes a really steady hand to hold a plane firmly when squaring up a half-inch board. As strange as it may sound, it's nearly just as hard with a two-inch plank. With the thin board, the plane can shift sideways if you're not extremely careful; while working on the thick plank, the constant urge is to move the plane along the surface at a slight angle, which is definitely going to cause issues. [Pg 207]
It only emphasizes the fact most clearly, that to do a good job the plane must be firmly held, that it must move along the board with the utmost precision, and that it should not be forced into the wood.
It clearly highlights that to do a good job, the plane needs to be held steady, it must glide along the board with the highest accuracy, and it shouldn't be pushed into the wood.
In smoothing down a board with the short smoothing plane, preparatory to sandpapering it, the better plan is to move the plane slightly across the grain. This will enable the bit to take hold better, and when the sandpaper is applied the course of the movement should be across the grain opposite the direction taken by the smoothing plane.
In smoothing a board with a short smoothing plane before sanding it, it's better to move the plane slightly against the grain. This helps the blade grip better, and when you apply the sandpaper, you should sand across the grain in the opposite direction of the smoothing plane's movement.
It is never satisfactory to draw the sandpaper directly along in the course of the grain. Such a habit will cause the sandpaper to fill up very rapidly, particularly with certain woods.
It’s never a good idea to move the sandpaper directly along the grain. This habit will quickly clog the sandpaper, especially with certain types of wood.
When gluing together joints or tenons, always wipe off the surplus glue with warm water taken from the glue pot. If you do not follow this advice [Pg 208] the glue will gum up the tools and the sandpaper used to finish the work.
When joining joints or tenons with glue, always wipe off the extra glue with warm water from the glue pot. If you don't follow this advice [Pg 208] the glue will stick to your tools and the sandpaper used to finish the work.
Never try to work from opposite sides of a piece of material. Have a work side and a work edge, and make all measurements therefrom. Mark each piece as you go along. Take a note mentally just how each piece is to be placed, and what must be done with it.
Never try to work from opposite sides of a piece of material. Have a work side and a work edge, and make all measurements from there. Mark each piece as you go. Keep in mind how each piece should be positioned and what needs to be done with it.
The carpenter, above all others, must be able to carry a mental picture of his product.
The carpenter, more than anyone else, must be able to visualize his finished product in his mind.
Never saw out the scribing or marking line, either in cutting or in ripping. The lines should be obliterated by the plane, when it is being finished, and not before.
Never saw the marking line, whether cutting or tearing. The lines should be removed by the plane during finishing, and not beforehand.
Make it a habit to finish off the surfaces and edges true and smooth before the ends are cut, or the mortises or tenons are made. This is one of the most frequent mistakes. No job can be a perfect one unless your material has been worked down to proper dimensions.
Make it a habit to finish the surfaces and edges neatly and smoothly before cutting the ends or making the mortises or tenons. This is one of the most common mistakes. No job can be perfect unless your material has been shaped to the right dimensions.
Learn to saw across a board squarely. This may be a hard thing for the novice to do. A long, easy stroke of the saw will prevent it from running, unless too badly set or filed, and will also enable you to hold it more nearly square with the board.
Learn to saw straight across a board. This might be difficult for beginners. A long, smooth stroke of the saw will stop it from drifting, unless it's too poorly adjusted or sharpened, and will also help you keep it more aligned with the board.
If you find that you invariably saw "out of true," then take some sawing lessons for your own [Pg 209] benefit, until you can judge whether the saw is held true or not.
If you notice that you always saw "out of true," then consider taking some sawing lessons for your own benefit, until you can tell whether the saw is being held correctly or not. [Pg 209]
It is better to saw up a half dozen boards in making the test than commit the error while working on a job.
It’s better to cut up a few boards while testing than to make a mistake while working on a project.
[Pg 211]
[Pg 211]
GLOSSARY OF WORDS
USED IN TEXT OF THIS VOLUME
Acute. Sharp, to the point.
Direct. Sharp, to the point.
Adjuster. A tool which measures distances and relative spaces.
Adjuster. A tool that measures distances and relative spaces.
Æsthetic. The theory of taste; science of the beautiful in nature and art.
Aesthetic. The theory of taste; the study of beauty in nature and art.
Abstract. That which exists in the mind only; separate from matter; to think of separately as a quality.
Abstract. Something that exists only in the mind; distinct from physical matter; to consider separately as a quality.
Alligator jaws. A term used to designate a pair of serrated bars which are held together in a headpiece, and capable of clamping bits between them.
Alligator jaws. A term used to refer to a pair of serrated bars that are held together in a headpiece and can clamp down on items placed between them.
Analyzed. Separated into its primitive or original parts.
Analyzed. Broken down into its basic or original components.
Anchor. Any device for holding an object in a fixed position.
Anchor. Any device used to keep an object in a stable position.
Angle dividers. A sort of double bevel tool so arranged that an angle can be made at the same time on both side of a base line.
Angle dividers. A type of double bevel tool designed to create an angle simultaneously on both sides of a baseline.
Angularly disposed. Forming an angle with reference to some part or position.
Angularly disposed. Positioned at an angle in relation to a specific part or location.
Archivolt. The architectural member surrounding the curved opening of an arch. More commonly the molding or other ornaments with which the wall face of an arch is changed.
Archivolt. The architectural element that surrounds the curved opening of an arch. More commonly, it refers to the molding or other decorations that alter the wall surface of an arch.
Artisan. One trained in some mechanic's art or trade.
Artisan. Someone skilled in a specific craft or trade.
Beaded. A piece of wood or iron having rounded creases on its surface.
Beaded. A piece of wood or metal with rounded grooves on its surface.
[Pg 212] Beam compass. A drawing compass in which the points are arranged to slide on a rod, instead of being fixed on dividers.
[Pg 212] Beam compass. A drawing compass where the points can slide along a rod instead of being fixed like in regular dividers.
Belfry. A bell-tower, usually attached to a church.
Belfry. A bell tower, usually connected to a church.
Bevel square. A handle to which is pivotally attached a blade, which may be swung and held at any desired angle.
Bevel square. A handle that has a blade attached to it with a pivot, allowing the blade to swing and be held at any angle you want.
Bisected. To divide, mark, or cut into two portions.
Bisected. To split, indicate, or cut into two parts.
Bit. A small tool, either for drilling, or for cutting, as a plane iron.
Bit. A small tool used for drilling or cutting, like a plane iron.
Braced collar. A form of roofing truss, in which the upper cross member is supported by a pair of angled braces.
Braced collar. A type of roofing truss where the top cross member is held up by a pair of angled braces.
Breast drill. A tool for holding boring tools, and designed to have the head held against the breast for forcing in the boring tool.
Breast drill. A tool used for holding drill bits, designed to press the head against the chest to drive in the drill bit.
Bridle joint. A form for securing elements together which provides a shallow depression in one member, and a chamfered member at its end to fit therein.
Bridle joint. A method for joining elements that creates a shallow groove in one part, with a beveled end on another part that fits into it.
Bungalow. A Bengalese term; originally a thatched or tiled house or cottage, single story, usually surrounded by a veranda.
Bungalow. A Bengali term; originally a thatched or tiled house or cottage, one story, usually with a veranda around it.
Bushing. A substance of any kind interposed, as, for instance, a wearing surface between a mandrel and its bearing.
Bushing. A material of any sort placed between two parts, like a surface that wears down between a mandrel and its bearing.
Butts. A term applied to certain hinges, usually of the large type.
Butts. A term used for specific types of hinges, typically the larger ones.
Callipered. A measured portion which has its side or thickness fixed by a finely graduated instrument.
Calibrated. A measured amount that has its side or thickness determined by a precisely marked tool.
Cambered. Slightly rising in the middle portion. An upward bend, or projection.
Cambered. Slightly raised in the middle. An upward curve or extension.
Capital. A small head or top of a column; the head or uppermost member of a pilaster.
Capital. The small top part of a column; the uppermost part of a pilaster.
[Pg 213] Cardinal. Pre-eminent, chief, main line; Cardinal line is the principal line to make calculations or measurements from.
[Pg 213] Cardinal. Most important, primary, main line; Cardinal line is the main line used for calculations or measurements.
Centering point. A place for the reception of the point of an instrument, like a compass or a dividers, or for the dead center of the tail-stock of a lathe.
Centering point. A spot for receiving the point of a tool, like a compass or dividers, or for the dead center of the tailstock of a lathe.
Cheekpiece. A piece or pieces at right angles to another piece, either fixed or movable, which serves as a rest or a guide.
Cheekpiece. A part or parts set at right angles to another part, either stationary or adjustable, that acts as a support or a guide.
Chiffonier. A movable and ornamental closet or piece of furniture with shelves and drawers.
Chiffonier. A portable and decorative cabinet or piece of furniture with shelves and drawers.
Chute. A channel in any material, or made of any substance, for conveying liquids or solids.
Chute. A channel made of any material for moving liquids or solids.
Circumference. The distance around an object.
Circumference. The distance around an object.
Circumferentially. Surrounding or encircling.
Surrounding. Surrounding or encircling.
Classical. Relating to the first class or rank, especially in literature or art.
Classical. Referring to the highest class or rank, especially in literature or art.
Cogged. Having teeth, either at regular or at irregular intervals.
Cogged. Having teeth, either at regular or irregular intervals.
Concrete. Expressing the thing itself specifically; also the quality; a specific example.
Concrete. Clearly expressing the actual thing; also refers to the quality; a specific example.
Configuration. Form, as depending on the relative disposition of the parts of a thing; a shape or a figure.
Configuration. Form, based on how the parts of something are arranged; a shape or a figure.
Coincide. To occupy the same place in space; to correspond exactly; to agree; to concur.
Coincide. To be in the same place in space; to match perfectly; to have the same opinion; to agree.
Correlation. A reference, as from one thing to another; the putting together of various parts.
Correlation. A connection between two things; the arrangement of different parts together.
Conventional. Something which grows out of or depends upon custom, or is sanctioned by general usage.
Conventional. Something that comes from or relies on tradition, or is accepted by common practice.
Craftsman. One skilled in a craft or trade.
Craftsman. Someone who is skilled in a craft or trade.
Curvature. The act of curving or being bent.
Curvature. The action of arching or bending.
[Pg 214] Concentrated. To bring to a common center; to bring together in one mass.
[Pg 214] Concentrated. To gather into a single center; to unite into one whole.
Dado. A plain flat surface between a base and a surbase molding. Sometimes a painted or encrusted skirting on interior walls.
Dado. A flat surface between the base and the top molding. Sometimes a painted or decorated border on interior walls.
Depth gage. A tool by means of which the depths of grooves and recesses are measured.
Depth gauge. A tool used to measure the depths of grooves and recesses.
Degree. Measure of advancement; quality; extent; a division or space.
Degree. A measure of progress; quality; amount; a section or area.
Discarded. Cast off; to reject or put away.
Discarded. Thrown away; to reject or set aside.
Deterioration. To grow worse; impairing in quality.
Deterioration. To get worse; decreasing in quality.
Depressed. A sunken surface or part.
Down. A sunken surface or part.
Diagrammatical. A drawing made to illustrate the working or the scheme, without showing all the parts or giving their relative positions or measurements.
Diagrammatical. A drawing created to show how something works or to outline a concept, without including all the details or providing their exact locations or sizes.
Diametrically. A direction toward the center or across the middle of a figure or thing.
Diametrically. A direction towards the center or across the middle of an object or shape.
Diagonal. A direction which is not parallel with or perpendicular to a line.
Diagonal. A direction that is not parallel or perpendicular to a line.
Dominate. To govern; controlling.
Dominate. To rule; controlling.
Door trim. The hardware which is attached to a door.
Door trim. The fittings that are attached to a door.
Double-roofed. All form of roof structure where there is an inner frame to support the rafters.
Double-roofed. A type of roof structure that includes an inner frame to support the rafters.
Drop forged. Metal forms which are struck up by means of heavy hammers, in which are the molds or patterns of the article to be formed.
Drop forged. Metal shapes that are created by heavy hammers, which contain the molds or patterns for the item being formed.
Elaboration. Wrought with labor; finished with great care.
Elaboration. Made with effort; completed with great attention to detail.
Elevation. The act of raising from a lower to a higher degree; a projection of a building or other object on a plane perpendicular to the horizon.
Elevation. The act of moving from a lower to a higher level; a depiction of a building or other object on a surface that is vertical to the horizon.
Elliptical. Having the form of an ellipse.
Elliptical. Shaped like an oval.
Embellishment. The act of adorning; that which adds beauty or elegance.
Embellishment. The act of decorating; anything that adds beauty or style.
[Pg 215] Entablature. The structure which lies horizontally upon the columns.
[Pg 215] Entablature. The horizontal structure that sits on top of the columns.
Equidistant. Being at an equal distance from a point.
Equidistant. Being the same distance from a point.
Escutcheon. An ornamental plate like that part about a keyhole.
Escutcheon. An ornamental plate similar to the area around a keyhole.
Evolve. To unfold or unroll; to open and expand.
Evolve. To develop or grow; to open up and broaden.
Façade. The front of a building; the principal front having some architectural pretensions.
Facade. The front of a building; the main front that has some architectural features.
Facing-boards. The finishing of the face of a wall of different material than the main part of the wall; the wide board below the cornice or beneath the windows.
Facing-boards. The finishing of the front of a wall made from a different material than the main section of the wall; the wide board below the cornice or under the windows.
Factor. One of the elements, circumstances or influences which contribute to produce a result.
Factor. One of the elements, circumstances, or influences that help create a result.
Fence. A term used to designate a metal barrier or guard on a part of a tool.
Fence. A term used to refer to a metal barrier or guard on a part of a tool.
Fish plate. A pair of plates, usually placed on opposite sides of the pieces to be secured together, and held by cross bolts.
Fish plate. Two plates, typically positioned on opposite sides of the pieces that need to be connected, and secured with cross bolts.
Flare. A pitch; an angle; an inclination.
Flare. A slope; a tilt; a lean.
Flush. Unbroken, or even in surface; on a level with the adjacent surface.
Flush. Even, or even with the surface; at the same level as the surrounding area.
Frog clamping screw. A screw which is designed to hold or adjust two angled pieces.
Frog clamping screw. A screw that is made to hold or adjust two angled pieces.
Fulcrum. That by which a lever is sustained, or on which a lever rests in turning or moving a body.
Fulcrum. The point that supports a lever, or on which a lever pivots to lift or move an object.
Fluting. The channel or channels in a body; as the grooves in a column.
Fluting. The channels or grooves on a surface; like the indentations in a column.
Gain. A square or beveled notch or groove cut out of a girder, beam, post or other material, at a corner.
Gain. A square or angled notch or groove cut out of a girder, beam, post, or other material, at a corner.
Gambrel. A roof having two different pitches, the upper much greater than the lower.
Gambrel. A roof with two different slopes, where the upper slope is much steeper than the lower one.
Geometry. Pertaining to that branch of mathematics which investigates [Pg 216] the relations, properties and measurements of solids, surfaces, lines and angles.
Geometry. This is the branch of mathematics that explores the relationships, properties, and measurements of solids, surfaces, lines, and angles. [Pg 216]
Girder. A main beam; a straight horizontal beam to span an opening or carry a weight, such as the ends of floor beams.
Girder. A primary beam; a straight horizontal beam that spans an opening or supports a weight, like the ends of floor beams.
Glossary. A collection or explanation of words and passages of the works of an author; a partial dictionary.
Glossary. A collection or explanation of words and sections from an author's works; a partial dictionary.
Graduated. Cut up into steps; divided into equal parts.
Graduated. Broken down into steps; split into equal sections.
Guide stock. A member which is the main portion of the tool, and from which all measurements are taken.
Guide stock. A part that is the main component of the tool, from which all measurements are made.
Hammer beam. A member in a truss roof structure, at the base of the roof proper, which consists of an inwardly projecting part, on which the roof rests, and from which it is braced.
Hammer beam. A component in a truss roof structure, located at the base of the actual roof, which features an inwardly extending part that supports the roof and from which it is braced.
Hammer-pole. The peon, or round end of a hammer which is used for driving nails.
Hammer-pole. The peon, or round end of a hammer that is used for driving nails.
Hemispherical. Pertaining to a half globe or sphere.
Hemispherical. Related to a half globe or sphere.
Horizontal. On the level; at right angles to a line which points to the center of the earth.
Horizontal. Flat; at a 90-degree angle to a line that points to the center of the Earth.
Incorporated. United in one body.
Incorporated. United as one.
Index pin. A small movable member which is designed to limit the movement of the operative part of a machine.
Index pin. A small adjustable component that is meant to restrict the movement of the working part of a machine.
Initial. To make a beginning with; the first of a series of acts or things.
Initial. To start with; the first in a series of actions or items.
Insulate. To place in a detached position; to separate from.
Insulate. To keep at a distance; to separate from.
Interchangeable. One for the other.
Interchangeable. One for another.
Interval. A space between things; a void space; between two objects.
Interval. A space between things; an empty space; between two objects.
Interest. To engage the attention of; to awaken or attract attention.
Interest. To capture someone’s attention; to stimulate or draw in interest.
[Pg 217] Interlocking jaw. Two or more parts of a piece of mechanism in which the said parts pass each other in their motions.
[Pg 217] Interlocking jaw. Two or more components of a mechanism that move past each other in their motions.
Intersection. The point or line in which one line or surface cuts another.
Intersection. The point or line where one line or surface crosses another.
Intervening. The portion between.
Intervening. The space in between.
Inverted. Turned over; to put upside down.
Inverted. Turned over; upside down.
Joggle-joint. A form of connection which has struts attached to a pendant post.
Joggle-joint. A type of connection that features struts connected to a hanging post.
Joinery. The art or trade of joining wood.
Joinery. The skill or profession of connecting pieces of wood together.
Kerf. A notch, channel or slit made in any material by cutting or sawing.
Kerf. A groove, channel, or slit created in any material by cutting or sawing.
Kit. A working outfit; a collection of tools or implements.
Kit. A set of clothes for working; a group of tools or equipment.
Level. A tool designed to indicate horizontal or vertical surfaces.
Level. A tool that shows if surfaces are horizontal or vertical.
Liberal. Not narrow or contracted.
Liberal. Open-minded and broad.
Lobe. Any projection, especially of a rounded form; the projecting part of a cam-wheel.
Lobe. Any outward projection, particularly one that is rounded; the protruding part of a cam wheel.
Longitudinal. In the direction of the length; running lengthwise.
Longitudinal. In the direction of the length; running along the length.
Lubrication. The system of affording oiling means to a machine or to any article.
Lubrication. The process of providing oil to a machine or any item.
Mandrel. The live spindle of a lathe; the revolving arbor of a circular saw.
Mandrel. The main rotating part of a lathe; the spinning shaft of a circular saw.
Mansard. A type of roof structure with two pitches, one, the lower, being very steep, and the other very flat pitch.
Mansard. A type of roof design that has two slopes: one is steep and the other is very flat.
Manual. Of or pertaining to the hand; done or made by hand.
Manual. Related to the hand; performed or created by hand.
Marginal. The border or edge of an object.
Marginal. The border or edge of something.
Marking gage. A bar on which is placed a series of points, usually equidistant from each other.
Marking gauge. A bar that has a series of points on it, typically spaced evenly apart.
[Pg 218]Matching. Placing tongue in one member and a corresponding groove in another member, so that they will join each other perfectly.
[Pg 218]Matching. Inserting a tongue into one part and a matching groove in another part, so they fit together seamlessly.
Mediæval. Of or relating to the Middle Ages.
Medieval. Related to the Middle Ages.
Miter-box. A tool for the purpose of holding a saw true at any desired adjustable angle.
Miter-box. A tool used to hold a saw at a precise angle that can be adjusted as needed.
Miter-square. A tool which provides adjustment at any desired angle.
Miter-square. A tool that allows you to make adjustments at any angle you want.
Mullion. A slender bar or pier which forms the vertical division between the lights of windows, screens, etc.; also, indoors, the main uprights are stiles, and the intermediate uprights are mullions.
Mullion. A narrow bar or post that creates the vertical separation between the panes of windows, screens, etc.; also, indoors, the main vertical supports are called stiles, and the smaller vertical supports are mullions.
Obliterated. Erased or blotted out.
Deleted. Erased or removed.
Obtuse. Not pointed; bent.
Obtuse. Not sharp; angled.
Orbit. The path made by a heavenly body in its travel around another body.
Orbit. The route that a celestial object takes as it travels around another object.
Ordinate. The distance of any point in a curve or a straight line, measured on a line called the axis of ordinates, or on a line parallel to it from another line, at right angles thereto, called the axis of abscissas.
Ordinate. The distance of any point on a curve or straight line, measured along a line known as the axis of ordinates, or on a line parallel to it from another line at a right angle, called the axis of abscissas.
Ornamentation. To embellish; to improve in appearance.
Ornamentation. To decorate; to enhance in appearance.
Oscillate. To swing like a pendulum.
Oscillate. To swing like a pendulum.
Overhang. In a general sense that which projects out.
Overhang. Generally, it's something that sticks out.
Paneling. A sunken compartment or portion with raised margins, molded or otherwise, as indoors, ceilings wainscoting, etc.
Paneling. A recessed area or section with raised edges, molded or not, like indoors, ceilings, wainscoting, etc.
Parallelogram. A right-lined quadrilateral figure, whose opposite sides are parallel and, consequently, equal.
Parallelogram. A four-sided shape with straight sides, where opposite sides are parallel and, therefore, equal in length.
Parallel. Extended in the same direction, and in all parts equally distant.
Parallel. Extended in the same direction, and at equal distances throughout.
Perspective. A view; a vista; the effect of distance upon the appearance of objects, by means of which the eye recognizes them as being at a more or less measurable distance.
Perspective. A view; a scene; the way distance affects how objects look, allowing the eye to identify them as being at a specific distance.
[Pg 219] Pivot. A fixed pin, or short axis, on the end of which a wheel or other body turns.
[Pg 219] Pivot. A stationary point or short axis at which a wheel or other object rotates.
Pitch. Slope; descent; declivity, like the slope of a roof.
Pitch. Angle; slope; incline, like the angle of a roof.
Placement. The act of placing; in the state of being placed.
Placement. The act of putting something in a particular spot; the condition of being situated.
Predominate. To be superior in number, strength, influence or authority; controlling.
Predominate. To be greater in number, strength, influence, or authority; to have control.
Produced. To lengthen out; to extend.
Produced. To lengthen; to extend.
Prototype. The original; that from which later forms sprang.
Prototype. The original; the basis from which later versions developed.
Purlin. A longitudinal piece of timber, under a roof, mid-*way between the eaves and comb, to hold the rafters.
Purlin. A long piece of wood, located under a roof, halfway between the eaves and the ridge, used to support the rafters.
Rabbeting. The manner of cutting grooves or recesses.
Rabbeting. The way of cutting grooves or notches.
Ratchet. A wheel, bar, or other form of member, having teeth or recesses.
Ratchet. A wheel, bar, or another type of part that has teeth or notches.
Rebate. A rectangular, longitudinal recess or groove, cut in the corner or edge of a body.
Rebate. A rectangular, long groove or indentation, cut into the corner or edge of an object.
Rail. A horizontal piece in a frame or paneling.
Rail. A horizontal section in a frame or paneling.
Rectangular. Right-angled; having one or more angles of ninety degrees; a four-sided figure having only right angles.
Rectangular. Right-angled; having one or more angles of ninety degrees; a four-sided shape with only right angles.
Rib and collar. A form of roof truss in which the collar between rafters is used as the thrust bearing for the ribs which project up from the hammer beam.
Rib and collar. A type of roof truss where the collar between the rafters acts as the thrust bearing for the ribs that extend upwards from the hammer beam.
Router. A tool for cutting grooves or recesses.
Router. A tool used for making grooves or indentations.
Saddle joint. A form of connection in which one part has a portion cut away, resembling a saddle, and in which the part to be attached has its end cut so as to fit the saddle thus formed.
Saddle joint. A type of connection where one part has a section carved out, looking like a saddle, and the part that needs to be attached has its end shaped to fit into the saddle created.
Scarfing. The cutting away of the ends of timbers to be joined, so the two parts on lapping will unite evenly.
Scarfing. The process of cutting the ends of timbers to be joined, so that the two overlapping parts fit together smoothly.
Scissors beam. A form of truss, in which there is a pair of interior braces formed like shears, and secured to the main rafters themselves.
Scissors beam. A type of truss that has a pair of interior braces shaped like scissors, secured to the main rafters.
[Pg 220] Score, Scored. Shear; cut; divide; also notching or marking.
[Pg 220] Score, Scored. To shear, cut, or divide; also refers to notching or marking.
Scratch awl. A sharp-pointed tool, with a handle.
Scratch awl. A pointed tool with a handle.
Scribe. To cut, indent or mark with a tool, such as a knife, awl or compass, so as to form a cutting line for the workman.
Scribe. To cut, indent, or mark with a tool like a knife, awl, or compass to create a cutting line for the worker.
Self-supporting. Held by itself; not depending upon outside aid.
Self-supporting. Able to stand on its own; not relying on external help.
Shank. Usually the handle, or portion to which the handle is attached.
Shank. Typically the part that connects to the handle.
Slitting gage. A tool which is designed to cut along a certain line guided by an adjustable fence.
Slitting gauge. A tool designed to cut along a specific line, guided by an adjustable fence.
Soffit. The under side of an arch.
Soffit. The bottom part of an arch.
Solid. Not hollow; full of matter; having a fixed form; hard; opposed to liquid or fluid.
Solid. Not empty; filled with substance; having a definite shape; hard; the opposite of liquid or fluid.
Spindle. A small mandrel; an arbor; a turning shaft.
Spindle. A small rod; a shaft; a turning pole.
Springer. The post or point at which an arch rests upon its support, and from which it seems to spring.
Springer. The location or point where an arch sits on its support and from which it appears to rise.
Sphere. A body or space continued under a single surface which, in every part, is equally distant from a point within called its center.
Sphere. A solid shape or space that extends uniformly under a single surface, which is equally far from a specific point inside it, known as its center.
Spur. A small part jutting from another.
Spur. A small section extending from another.
Strike plate. A plate serving as a keeper for a beveled latch bolt and against which the latter strikes in closing.
Strike plate. A plate that acts as a holder for a beveled latch bolt and that the bolt hits when closing.
Steel Tubing. Pipes made from steel; tubing is measured across from outside to outside; piping is measured on the inside.
Steel Tubing. Pipes made from steel; tubing is measured from outside edge to outside edge; piping is measured from inside edge to inside edge.
Step-wedge. A wedge having one straight edge, and the other edge provided with a succession of steps, by means of which the piece gradually grows wider.
Step-wedge. A wedge with one straight edge and the other edge featuring a series of steps that gradually make the piece wider.
Strain, Stresses. To act upon in any way so as to cause change of form or volume; as forces on a beam to bend it.
Strain, Stresses. To influence in any way that leads to a change in shape or size; for example, forces on a beam that cause it to bend.
[Pg 221] Strut. Any piece of timber which runs from one timber to another, and is used to support a part.
[Pg 221] Strut. A piece of wood that connects one beam to another and is used to support a section.
Stub. A projecting part, usually of some defined form, and usually designed to enter or engage with a corresponding recess in another member.
Stub. A protruding part, typically with a specific shape, and usually meant to fit into or connect with a matching recess in another component.
Submerged. To be buried or covered, as with a fluid; to put under.
Submerged. To be buried or covered, like with a liquid; to put underneath.
Swivel. A pivoted member, used in many forms of tools, in which one part turns on the other.
Swivel. A pivoted component found in various tools, where one part rotates around the other.
Tail-stock. The sliding support or block in a lathe, which carries the dead spindle, or adjustable center.
Tail-stock. The sliding support or block in a lathe that holds the fixed spindle or adjustable center.
Technical. Of or pertaining to the useful in mechanical arts, or to any science, business, or the like.
Technical. Relating to something useful in mechanical fields, or to any science, business, or similar area.
Texture. The disposition of the several parts of any body in connection with each other; or the manner in which the parts are united.
Texture. The arrangement of the different parts of any object in relation to one another; or the way in which the parts are joined together.
Tool rest. That part of a lathe, or other mechanism, which supports a tool, or holds the tool support.
Tool rest. The part of a lathe or other machine that supports a tool or holds the tool holder.
Torso. The human body as distinguished from the head and limbs.
Torso. The human body excluding the head and limbs.
Transverse. In a crosswise direction; lying across; at right angles to the longitudinal.
Transverse. In a crosswise direction; lying across; at right angles to the lengthwise.
Trimmer. A beam, into which are framed the ends of headers in floor framing, as when a hole is left for stairs, chimneys, and the like.
Trimmer. A beam that supports the ends of headers in floor framing, such as when there’s an opening for stairs, chimneys, and similar structures.
Truss. An assemblage of members of wood or iron, supported at two points, and arranged to transmit pressure vertically to those points with the least possible strain, across the length of any member.
Truss. A structure made of wood or metal parts, supported at two points, designed to transfer pressure straight down to those points with minimal stress across the length of any part.
Tusk. In mechanism, a long projecting part, longer than a tenon, and usually applied to the long or projecting part of a tenon.
Tusk. In mechanics, a long projecting piece, longer than a tenon, typically used for the long or protruding part of a tenon.
[Pg 222] Universal joint. A joint wherein one member is made to turn with another, although the two turning members are not in a line with each other.
[Pg 222] Universal joint. A joint that allows one part to rotate with another, even though the two rotating parts are not aligned with each other.
Vocation. Employment; trade; profession; business.
Vocation. Job; trade; profession; business.
Voissoir. One of the wedgelike stones of which an arch is composed.
Voissoir. One of the wedge-shaped stones that make up an arch.
THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
Woodworking for Kids
A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
A book that covers, in a practical and engaging way, all topics related to the "King of Trades." It details the care and use of tools, drawing, designing, and planning work. It explains the principles involved in constructing various types of structures and includes the basics of architecture. There are over two hundred and fifty illustrations created specifically for this book, and it also features a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the field. This is the most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
Electricity for Kids
The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.
The author has taken a unique approach by outlining the basic principles in each part of the science and applying the concepts in the following stages. It explains how knowledge has evolved and the reasons behind different phenomena, avoiding technical jargon to make it accessible for every kid. It includes a full glossary of terms and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.
Practical Mechanics for Kids
This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.
This book guides beginners through a detailed series of hands-on shop activities, covering the use of tools, the structure and operation of shop machinery, how they are used to accomplish tasks, and how all dimensional work is done. Each topic is illustrated, and model building is explained. It includes a glossary with a new system of cross-references, which will be a helpful addition in clarifying topics. Fully illustrated.
Price 60 cents per volume
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 4th Ave, New York
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
By ROGER T. FINLAY
Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and an aged Professor who are cast away on an island with absolutely nothing but their clothing. By gradual and natural stages they succeed in constructing all forms of devices used in the mechanical arts and learn the scientific theories involved in every walk of life. These subjects are all treated in an incidental and natural way in the progress of events, from the most fundamental standpoint without technicalities, and include every department of knowledge. Numerous illustrations accompany the text.
Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and an old Professor who are stranded on an island with nothing but the clothes on their backs. Over time, they manage to build all kinds of tools used in engineering and learn the scientific principles behind everyday life. These topics are discussed in a casual and organic way as events unfold, starting from the basics without any technical jargon, and cover a wide range of knowledge. Many illustrations accompany the text.
Two Thousand things every boy ought to know. Every page a romance. Every line a fact.
Two thousand things every boy should know. Every page a story. Every line a fact.
Six titles—60 cents per volume
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
The Castaways
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
Exploring the Island
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
The Mysteries of the Caverns
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
The Tribesmen
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
The Capture and Pursuit
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
The Conquest of the Savages
PUBLISHED BY
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 Fourth Ave, New York
The Hickory Ridge Scouts
A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS
Which, in addition to the interesting boy scout stories by CAPTAIN ALAN DOUGLAS, Scoutmaster, contain articles on nature lore, native animals and a fund of other information pertaining to out-of-door life, that will appeal to the boy's love of the open.
I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol
I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol
Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.
The scouts' first camping trip gives them a great opportunity to put their newly acquired skills into action. Elmer Chenoweth, a kid from the northwest woods, impresses everyone with his extensive knowledge of camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.
II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good
II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Succeeded
This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys are called upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with healthful excitement.
This story features many exciting situations where some of the boys must use their creativity and selflessness. It's an adventure filled with positive thrills.
III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot
III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Newbie
Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one after the other.
Some mysteries get solved in a truly unexpected way, thanks to our young friends. A series of events unfolds quickly, one after another.
IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield
IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield
They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years.
They show the same teamwork here as they did at camp. The account of the final game against a rival town's team and how it played out creates an exciting story. It's one of the best baseball tales in recent years.
V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop
V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop
After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations.
After weeks of preparation, the scouts embark on their biggest adventure. Their journey takes them far from home, and the friendly competition among different patrols leads to many interesting and funny situations.
VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day
VI. Endurance Test; or, How True Determination Won the Day
Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written.
Few stories resonate with us more than examples of courage in the face of obvious challenges. Our heroes demonstrate their true character and astonish their most dedicated fans. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has ever written.
Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy Scout Series
Wild Animals of the United States—Tracking—in Number I.
Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States in Number II.
Reptiles of the United States in Number III.
Fishes of the United States in Number IV.
Insects of the United States in Number V.
Birds of the United States in Number VI.
Wild Animals of the United States - Tracking - Volume I.
Trees and Wildflowers of the United States - Volume II.
Reptiles of the United States - Volume III.
Fish of the United States - Volume IV.
Insects of the United States - Volume V.
Birds of the United States - Volume VI.
Cloth Binding Cover Illustrations in Four Colors 40c. Per Volume
Cloth Binding Cover Illustrations in Four Colors 40 cents per Volume
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK
THE
Campfire and Trail Series
1. In Camp on the Big Sunflower.
2. The Rivals of the Trail.
3. The Strange Cabin on Catamount Island.
4. Lost in the Great Dismal Swamp.
5. With Trapper Jim in the North Woods.
6. Caught in a Forest Fire.
1. Camping on the Big Sunflower.
2. The Competitors of the Trail.
3. The Mysterious Cabin on Catamount Island.
4. Missing in the Great Dismal Swamp.
5. With Trapper Jim in the Northern Woods.
6. Trapped in a Forest Fire.
By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE
By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE
A series of wholesome stories for boys told in an interesting way and appealing to their love of the open.
A collection of uplifting stories for boys, presented in an engaging manner that captures their love for the outdoors.
Each, 12mo. Cloth. 40 cents per volume
Each, 12mo. Cloth. $0.40 per volume
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 FOURTH AVENUE
NEW YORK
Christy Mathewson's Book
A Ripping Good Baseball Story by One Who Knows the Game
A Great Baseball Story by Someone Who Understands the Game
This book has attained a larger sale than any baseball story ever published.
This book has sold more copies than any baseball story ever published.
The narrative deals with the students of a large university and their baseball team, the members of which have names which enable the reader to recognize them as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day before their entrance into the major leagues.
The story revolves around the students at a large university and their baseball team, featuring characters with names that clearly reference some of the top baseball stars of their era before they reach the major leagues.
One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball" stripped of wearisome technicalities. The book is profusely illustrated throughout and contains also a number of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description of each.
Cloth bound 5½ x 7⅝ Price 60c. per volume
Cloth bound 5½ x 7⅝ Price $0.60 per volume
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK
ECONOMICAL COOKING
Primrose Edition
Planned for Two or More Persons
By
MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS
Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York Association for Improving the Condition of the Poor
Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors
Printed on high-quality book paper. Color cover design.
Many Cook Books have been published, from time to time, to meet various requirements, or to elucidate certain theories, but very few have been written to meet the needs of the large proportion of our population who are acutely affected by the constantly increasing cost of food products. Notwithstanding that by its valuable suggestions this book helps to reduce the expense of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned that the economies effected thereby are not offset by any lessening in the attractiveness, variety or palatability of the dishes.
Many cookbooks have been released over the years to cater to various needs or clarify certain concepts, but very few have been made for the large segment of our population who are significantly affected by the rising cost of food. While this book provides valuable tips to help lower the cost of feeding families, it ensures that the savings do not compromise the appeal, variety, or flavor of the dishes.
Of equal importance are the sections of this work which deal with food values, the treatment of infants and invalids and the proper service of various dishes.
Equally important are the sections that discuss nutritional values, the care of infants and sick individuals, and the proper presentation of different dishes.
The recipes are planned for two persons, but may readily be adapted for a larger number. The book is replete with illustrations and tables of food compositions—the latter taken from the latest Government statistics.
The recipes are intended for two people but can be easily modified for larger groups. The book includes illustrations and tables of food compositions based on the latest government statistics.
Cloth Binding Illustrated 40c. per volume, postpaid
Cloth Binding Illustrated $0.40 per volume, shipping included
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK
Cut-out and coloring books
An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of riper years.
An original line of art studies printed in vibrant colors on high-quality paper. This series presents many innovative features of interest, and since the topics have been chosen with great care, the books appeal strongly not only to young children but even to older readers.
Post Cards | Painting Book |
Dolls of all Nations | Scissors Book |
Our Army | Scissors Book |
Children's Pets | Puzzle Book |
Size 8¼ x 10¼ inches
Price 15c. per copy
Send for sample and trade discount
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
147 FOURTH AVENUE NEW YORK
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!